JP2018082775A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of reducing an influence on an electrical part, even when a foreign matter such as drink enters an operation part of the game machine.SOLUTION: In a game machine including control means for controlling a game performance, and an operation part operable by a player, the operation part includes an electrical part, and further includes a protection mechanism for protecting the electrical part to a foreign matter entering from above the electrical part. Hereby, an influence on the electrical part caused by entrance of a foreign matter such as drink can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a ball game machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a revolving game machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In gaming machines represented by pachinko machines and the like, it is known to provide a production button on the front side of the gaming machine in order to improve the production effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-119856

  In recent years, each company has made a distinction by increasing the size of the production buttons as described in Patent Document 1 above, installing an electrical device inside the production buttons, turning on the LEDs, or raising and lowering the production buttons themselves. Attempts have been made. By the way, the amusement hall sells drinks such as juice, but it is also possible to accidentally spill drinks on the production buttons. If it scatters a little, the surface can be wiped off quickly, but if it flows into the inside of the gap between the production buttons, it must be disassembled to remove it. If left unattended, the electrical equipment could be short-circuited, causing malfunctions and destruction, and the game could not be continued.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the influence on the electrical device even if foreign matter such as drink is mixed in the production button. Is to provide.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1]
Control means for controlling game effects;
In a gaming machine comprising an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The operation unit is
Comprising an electrical component controlled by the control means;
The gaming machine further includes a protection mechanism that protects the electrical component from foreign matters entering from above the electrical component.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, even if foreign materials, such as a drink, approach into an operation part, it becomes possible to provide the gaming machine which can reduce the influence on an electrical equipment part.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 108. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 114. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. FIG. 123 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payment control part of FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a payout control unit main process and a payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 129. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a block diagram of 2nd Embodiment which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arrange | positioned at the game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows a circuit structure when the several sensor signal input part each connected to each of several magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel with the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) which has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit to the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the other example (Example 5) which has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit to the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 6) which has arrange | positioned the avoidance part and detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit in the main control board. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 7) in which a voltage output unit, an avoidance unit, and a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the fundamental composition of the electrical connection mainly with a detection sensor part, a panel relay board | substrate, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in the gaming machine of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay board | substrate or a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the example of arrangement | positioning of a panel relay board | substrate and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic composition of an electrical connection about the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a periphery control board, a drive board, a drive means, and a movable effect body. It is the front view which showed notionally the some movable accessory for presentation provided in the game machine, and grouping of a some movable accessory. It is a timing chart which shows an example in the case of performing recovery operation | movement to the initial position of the several movable accessory which belongs to the accessory group 01. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the periphery control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a block diagram which shows the earth system | strain of a gaming machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit provided with the earth circuit board from diagonally backward. It is the perspective view which looked at the storage case part which accommodated the earth circuit board from the upper part. It is a circuit diagram of an earth circuit board. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed aspect of a ball tank.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided.
The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image; A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 that can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy driving the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, The player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front.
The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51.
The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101 and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view.
The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The door frame collar 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the illegal string is manipulated to allow the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154.
Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4 A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The handle return spring 190 is urged, and one end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the top bowl and unit after removing the top bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the left and right center in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with its upper and rear opened.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward.
In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  In the effect operation unit 300, there is a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a clearance between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, liquids such as coffee and juice and powdered objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter as foreign objects. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 cause problems, a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and a gap between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. If a foreign object is caught between the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, the rotation operation unit 302, and the like, there is a possibility of causing problems such as the smooth movement. Therefore, a drain hole 311a is formed in the unit lower cover 311 as a mechanism for discharging these foreign substances from the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

  Although a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, no members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower plate 202 are provided directly below some of the drain holes 311a, and foreign matter is discharged from these drain holes 311a. When it is done, it falls directly on the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. With such a configuration, the foreign matter discharged from the drain hole 311a can be kept away from the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being soiled by the discharged foreign matter. Become.

  In the present embodiment, no member constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower plate 202 is provided directly below some of the drain holes 311a, but the lower plate 202 is positioned directly below the drain holes 311a. Also good. By setting it as such a structure, since a liquid stays in the lower tray 202, it becomes possible to suppress that the mounting surface of the island installation in which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted is contaminated.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque polycarbonate resin having a thickness of about 2 mm. By adopting such a configuration, even if foreign matter that could not be discharged by the drain hole 311a remains around the drain hole 311a inside the unit lower cover 311, its presence cannot be confirmed from the external appearance, It is possible to suppress the decline.

  On the other hand, the unit lower cover 311 may be formed of a transparent resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. With this configuration, when a foreign object enters the rendering operation unit 300 from above and a foreign object flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the door frame 3 is opened and the dish unit 200 is removed from the door frame 3. In addition, it is possible to remove the production operation unit 300 from the dish unit 200 and confirm the internal state of the production operation unit 300 without the need for trouble, and that foreign objects have entered the production operation unit 300 through observation from outside. The foreign matter discharge state by the drain hole 311a and the foreign matter staying state in the unit lower cover 311 can be confirmed. Depending on the foreign matter entering state to the production operation unit 300, the business using the pachinko machine 1 is stopped, the pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the cleaning and replacement of parts.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is provided in the unit lower cover 311 is shown, the drain hole 311a may not be provided. Even in such a configuration, the above-described effects can be achieved both when the unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque resin or when formed of a transparent resin. Further, by preventing the drain hole 311a from being provided, it is possible to prevent mischief or harassment by a player such as inserting a metal thin wire such as a wire or a piano wire from below into the drain hole 311a. Is possible.

  The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape. With such a configuration, when liquid enters the rendering operation unit 300 as foreign matter from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the resistance of the liquid passing through the drain hole 311 a is reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 It becomes possible to quickly discharge to the outside. Further, when solids such as cigarette ash enter the production operation unit 300 as foreign matter from above and flow down to the unit lower cover 311, solids passing through the drain holes 311 a are prevented from staying in the drain holes 311 a. It is possible to quickly discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

  Although the embodiment has been described in which the drain hole 311a is linearly formed in such a shape that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, the drain hole 311a may have such a non-linear shape. For example, the shape of the drain hole may be bent in an arc shape or an S shape. By adopting such a configuration, it is a member provided in the production operation unit 300 from mischief or harassment by a player such as inserting a metal thin wire such as a wire or a piano wire from below into the drain hole 311a. It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like.

  The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a columnar shape, and its diameter is about 2 mm. The drain hole 311a is provided for discharging foreign matter that has entered the production operation unit 300, but it is necessary to bear in mind that mischief or harassment by the player, such as inserting foreign matter into the drain hole 311a, is performed. There is. As foreign objects to be inserted, the player's own fingers (diameter of about 15-20 mm), game balls (diameter of about 11 mm), cigarettes (diameter of about 8 mm), metal wires such as wire / piano wire (diameter of 0.2- About 2 mm) is assumed. In order to prevent the insertion of these foreign substances, it is desirable that the diameter of the drain holes 311a be smaller than the diameter of these foreign substances. On the other hand, when the diameter of the drain hole 311a is reduced, the influence of the surface tension of the liquid flowing into the unit lower cover 311 becomes a size that cannot be ignored, and the liquid discharge efficiency from the drain hole 311a may be reduced. is there. Therefore, in this embodiment, the diameter of the drain hole 311a is about 2 mm.

  Among the foreign substances assumed to be inserted, the player's finger, game ball, and cigarette can be impulsively inserted into the drain hole 311a without any prior preparation. On the other hand, a thin metal wire such as a wire / piano wire is not usually carried by the player, and cannot be inserted into the drain hole 311a unless it is carried in the hall systematically. Compared to the possibility of such a situation, the possibility that a player's finger, game ball, or cigarette will be inserted is considered to be relatively high. Therefore, as a countermeasure against a situation in which a player's finger, game ball, or cigarette is inserted in a seizure manner, the diameter of the drain hole 311a may be less than 8 mm. With such a configuration, the vibration speaker 354, which is a member provided in the production operation unit 300, from mischief or harassment of inserting a player's finger, game ball, or cigarette from below into the drain hole 311a. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like can be protected.

  Although the drain hole 311a has a cylindrical shape, the drain hole 311a is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and has a slit shape, a tapered shape, a square shape such as a square / rectangular shape, and the like. Also good. Even in these shapes, by making the width of the narrowest part of the drainage hole 311a less than 8 mm, from the mischief and harassment act of inserting a player's finger, game ball, cigarette into the drainage hole 311a, It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like, which are members provided in the effect operation unit 300.

  The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a columnar shape. However, in the state where the rendering operation unit 300 including the unit lower cover 311 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the drain hole 311a is formed. It is in the state which inclined so that it may be located in the back as it goes below. In this embodiment, it inclines only rearward at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where the momentum is applied toward the rear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from being scattered on clothes or the like of a player who is sitting on a chair and playing a game. Further, when the player is not playing a game, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing on the seating portion of the chair. In addition, when a large amount of liquid enters the production operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the water pressure applied to the drain hole 311 a becomes strong, and the liquid vigorously moves toward the rear side. As a result, the effect of preventing the liquid from splashing on the player's clothes and the like can be further enhanced.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward is shown, the drain hole 311a may be formed so as not to be inclined. By setting it as such a structure, since the fall position of the liquid discharged | emitted from the drain hole 311a will be limited just under the drain hole 311a, on the mounting surface of the island installation in which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted It is possible to easily predict the position of the liquid falling in the case, and to easily take measures against the liquid falling.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward is shown, the drain hole 311a may be inclined so that it is positioned forward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where the momentum is applied toward the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ball tray in each counter counting system.

  Although the embodiment has been shown in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward, the drain hole 311a may be inclined such that it is positioned leftward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where the momentum is applied toward the left side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling on the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tray in each counter counting system, and the player's hand operating the handle 182. It becomes possible to do.

  Although the embodiment has been shown in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward, it may be inclined such that it is positioned rightward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign substance, the liquid is discharged in a state where the momentum is applied toward the right side. With such a configuration, a dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a ball tray in each counter counting system, a pedestal machine generally installed on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and in each counter counting system It becomes possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-machine.

  The embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward, and the state where the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned forward, left, and right as it goes downward. However, the drain holes 311a may be inclined in a direction that combines the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling on the player, the game hall facility, or the like. For example, when the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned to the left front as it goes downward, the right hand of the player who operates the handle 182, a dollar box, a ball tray in each counter counting system, and an intermediary machine And it becomes possible to suppress that a liquid falls with respect to the flow path which connects the ball | bowl saucer and a pedestal machine in each stand counting system.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality (specifically, eight) of drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311. By adopting such a configuration, even when a situation occurs in which part of the drainage hole 311a is clogged with foreign matter that has flowed down or is blocked by gum from the outside by a player, the discharge function of the drainage hole 311a can be achieved. It can be secured.

  Although the embodiment in which a plurality of (specifically, eight) drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311 is shown, only one drain hole 311a may be provided. With such a configuration, the liquid drop position is limited as compared with the case where a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, and thus it is possible to reduce the area of the game facility that becomes dirty due to the liquid drop.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided below the spherical unit lower cover 311 that protrudes downward (specifically, eight). The height is changed so that there are two at the top and two at the top. With such a configuration, when the amount of liquid flowing into the inside of the unit lower cover 311 is small, the liquid is discharged only from the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end. The four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end are close to each other and the liquid dropping position is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming facility from being contaminated by the liquid falling. On the other hand, when a large amount of liquid has flowed in and a large amount of liquid has accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, two drain holes 311 a provided at an intermediate height, and further, 2 provided above are provided. The liquid is also discharged from the two drain holes 311a. In this case, it is possible to increase the liquid discharge amount per unit time as compared with the case where the liquid is discharged using the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  Since the upper part of the main body 321 is attached so that its upper part is inclined forward, the liquid flowing into the bottom wall 321a flows down on the bottom wall 321a and moves forward. A plurality of (specifically, three) through-holes 321b are provided at the front side end of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid that has moved forward is discharged from the through-hole 321b and the unit lower cover 311. Fall towards the. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a and the vibration speaker 354 fails.

  The embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a is shown. However, instead of the vibration speaker 354, a motor for driving / vibration generation, a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, a dish unit relay board 214 A board box 391 in which an operation unit relay board 392 that relays a signal sent from the display operation unit 300 to the production operation unit 300 may be attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which liquid enters these articles and the articles break down.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to substantially the center of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but the position where the vibration speaker 354 is attached may be a rear region on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, even if the mounting position of the vibration speaker 354 is increased, and a large amount of liquid enters the rendering operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the bottom wall 321a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the liquid crystal and the vibration speaker 354 fails.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. However, the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a is provided with an upright wall that stands upright in a direction perpendicular to the bottom wall 321a. May be covered. With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the liquid flows down the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. This can be suppressed.

  Although the example in which the standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354 is shown, a part of the periphery of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered by the standing wall. For example, at least the rear side of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered with a standing wall. Further, the standing wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the vibration speaker 354 and the peripheral edge of the bottom wall 321a are closest to each other. In addition, regarding the part where the wiring of the vibration speaker 354 is provided, the standing wall may not be provided in the corresponding part. With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the liquid flows down the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, compared with the case where a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354, the heat dissipation of the vibration speaker 354 can be improved.

  A plurality of ribs for increasing the strength of the bottom wall 321a are provided on the upper surface of the bottom wall 321a in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. Further, the height of the rib in the left-right direction (about 0.5 mm) is lower than the height of the rib in the front-rear direction (about 2 mm). With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the liquid flowing into the operation unit base 320 to the through hole 321b without stagnation while maintaining the strength of the bottom wall 321a.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically.
The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331.
The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape.
The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward.

Here, the principle of the vibration speaker 354 will be briefly described. The vibration speaker 354 includes a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, and the like, as in a general dynamic speaker. In addition, a magnetic circuit unit including the magnet is elastically supported in the vibration speaker 354. When a sine wave having a predetermined frequency is input to the voice coil from the sound source IC, the voice coil is excited, and the elastically supported magnetic circuit unit resonates to generate vibrations. It is a mechanism for transmitting vibration to the outside of the 354.
On the other hand, as a conventional method for generating vibration, there is known a method for generating vibration by rotating a motor (so-called “eccentric motor”) having an eccentric weight attached to an output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor. .
Compared with this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 is advantageous in that it is thin and does not take up space, can obtain a stronger vibration than the method using an eccentric motor of the same size, and has high directivity of vibration. There is. In addition, the method using the eccentric motor has an advantage in that the vibration speaker 354 has high durability, while a large load is applied to the output shaft and is easily broken.

An effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body portion 321 via a leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 to the button unit base. It is configured to be transmitted to the production operation button unit 360 via the leg portion 361b of 361.
In addition, an effect operation ring 330 is attached to the main body part 321 via a flange part 322, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is produced from the bottom wall of the main body part 321 via the flange part 322. It is configured to be transmitted to the ring 330.
The main body 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is detected by the main body 321. The unit 321 is configured to be transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 through a plurality of legs 323 protruding downward from the bottom wall of the main body 321 from the bottom wall of the main body 321.
Further, the vibration from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 is transmitted to the unit front cover 312.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, and this vibration is transmitted via the operation unit base 320, whereby the effect operation unit 300 can be vibrated.

  In addition, the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically and the axis passing through the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration with respect to the axial direction of the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically, the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the surface that forms the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are perpendicular to each other. By making the passing axis the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically and the axis passing through the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. The vibration speaker 354 generates vibration with respect to the axial direction of the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 perpendicularly. Therefore, the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the center of the surface that forms the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are arranged. By making the axis that passes vertically the same, vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, the vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 and the operation direction of the pressing operation unit 303 are configured to be parallel. In this case, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be directly transmitted to the player in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by the player.

  Further, the vibration speaker 354 is not attached to a member that is moved by a player's pressing operation like the pressing operation unit 303, but is not directly moved by a player's pressing operation. On the other hand, it is attached so as to be separated from the pressing operation portion 303. Thereby, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303. As compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is mounted in a member to be mounted, it is possible to suppress the impact exerted on the movable body such as the voice coil and the diaphragm provided in the vibration speaker 354 and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Note that the means for generating vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even when an eccentric motor is employed as the means for generating vibration, the eccentric motor is also moved by a pressing operation by the player. By attaching it to a portion where there is no occurrence, it becomes possible to prevent the output shaft of the eccentric motor from being damaged.

  The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320 by transmitting the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320. By transmitting vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower dish 202 included in the dish decoration unit 250 that constitutes the dish unit 200 and the upper dish 201 included in the dish base unit 210 that also constitutes the dish unit 200 are provided. It may be vibrated.

  In this case, when the effect operation unit 300 is vibrated as an effect in the gaming machine, vibration is also generated as an effect for a player who is touching the upper plate 201 without touching the effect operation unit 300. Since this can be recognized, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by vibrating the upper plate 201, the game ball B staying in the upper plate 201 can be smoothly supplied to the ball launcher 540.

  Further, by vibrating the lower tray 202, the game balls B staying in the lower tray 202 can be smoothly discharged downward of the tray unit 200.

Although the example in which the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the entire presentation operation unit 300 and further transmits the vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the presentation operation unit 300 is attached has been shown, the vibration is not transmitted to the handle unit 180. It is desirable to do so. This is because the operation of the handle 182 by the player may be hindered by the vibration of the handle unit 180.
In order to prevent vibration from being transmitted to the handle unit 180, a member that absorbs vibration may be provided inside the handle insertion opening 252g, or the magnitude of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 may be adjusted.

  Further, the production operation unit 300 has a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a space between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, liquids such as coffee and juice and powdered objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter as foreign objects. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 cause problems, a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and a gap between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. If the foreign object is caught between the center pressing operation part 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b, the rotation operation part 302 and the like, the foreign object may not move smoothly. It is desirable to provide a mechanism for

  Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as an effect in the gaming machine, and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign matters fall downward in the effect operation unit 300 and appear on the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311. It is configured so that it can be collected and finally discharged from the drain hole 311a. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the rendering operation unit 300, vibration can be efficiently transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 that is also installed below the rendering operation unit 300. .

  The generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used as an effect in the gaming machine. At this time, since foreign matter can be discharged at the same time, it is possible to cope with the entry of foreign matter without interrupting the game. It becomes. In addition, since the occurrence of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 occurs with a predetermined probability as an effect in the gaming machine, foreign matter is periodically discharged, so that the effect operation unit 300 is normally operated for a long period of time. It becomes possible.

Although an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 has been shown as an effect by the gaming machine, a store clerk or a player who has entered a foreign object operates the effect operation unit 301 to arbitrarily generate vibration by the vibration speaker 354. You may enable it to generate a vibration.
In this case, it is preferable that vibration can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-game where the symbol does not change or when the power is turned on. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the production operation unit 300 is large, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the drain hole 311a as compared with the case of waiting for the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 to occur as an effect in the gaming machine. It becomes possible.
In addition, when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is arbitrarily generated by operating the effect operation unit 301, the duration of the vibration speaker 354 is different from that when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is used for the effect in the gaming machine. Vibrations may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect in the gaming machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the foreign matter that has entered is discharged similarly to the case where vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. Can be urged.
Similarly to the case where vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the store clerk or the player himself who has made a foreign object enter the display operation unit 301 can arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303. Or the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated.
In this case, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during non-game or when the power is turned on when the symbol is not changed, the press operation unit 303 can be raised and lowered and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Good. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the effect operation unit 300 is large, and as an effect in the gaming machine, as compared with the case where the press operation unit 303 rises or falls or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 waits for accidental occurrence. It becomes possible to quickly discharge foreign matter from the drain hole 311a.
In addition, by arbitrarily operating the effect operation unit 301 to raise or lower the press operation unit 303 or to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the press operation unit 303 is raised or lowered, and the effect operation ring 330 is operated. As compared with the case where the rotation is used for the effect in the gaming machine, the raising / lowering or the rotation may be generated at a different duration or at a different speed.

  In the present embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, a sound wave having a frequency of about 40 Hz ± 2 Hz is output. This frequency is close to the lower limit of the human audible range. Considering the masking effect by the environmental sound such as pachinko halls installed in the game machine and the audible sound output from other speakers (for example, the main body frame speaker 622) of the gaming machine itself, it is not substantially recognizable by human hearing. .

  On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled so as to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker by giving a signal that outputs a sound wave having a higher frequency than when generating vibration to the vibration speaker 354 from the sound source IC. It is also possible to do.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300 can output both vibration and audible sound in accordance with a signal given from the sound source IC.

  Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the intensity of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

  Further, a signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be supplied continuously or intermittently. For example, continuous vibration is generated by supplying a signal continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), or signal supply is started and stopped every predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By doing so, intermittent vibrations may be generated. This makes it possible to improve interest.

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is moved. Therefore, strong vibration is transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342, and the operation ring drive motor 342 may be stepped out. Therefore, it is desirable that the operation ring drive motor 342 and the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 are exclusively performed. For example, after the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 and then stopped, the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration or the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, and then the vibration is generated. After the operation is stopped, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Thereby, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the operation ring drive motor 342, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, when the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is driven, the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered. However, even when a stepping motor is used as the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, As in the case, it is desirable that the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 and the vibration speaker 354 are exclusively driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation button elevating drive motor 367 from being stepped out, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the control for raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303.

  In addition, it is preferable that the vibration transmitted to the game area 5a can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-game where the symbol does not change or when the power is turned on. Thereby, without opening the door frame 3, a ball clogged state (a so-called "grape" state) in which the game ball B is clogged between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail or between the obstacle nail and various accessories, or movable It is possible to eliminate the state where the ball is sandwiched by the winning device (so-called “ball biting” state).

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted through the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is placed in the operation unit base 320 with the upper portion thereof tilted forward, and the button unit base 361 and the button unit base 361 which are a part of the effect operation button unit 360. Similarly, the disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side is also placed in the operation unit base 320 in a tilted state. With such a configuration, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b, the entering liquid flows down the upper surface of the gear cover 372 to the front side, It will flow down into the operation unit base 320.

  In addition, an operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is attached to a rear region on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 even when the liquid enters from the gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. It becomes.

  The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is provided with an operation button lifting / lowering drive motor terminal 367a on the side surface for power supply and control, but the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor terminal 367a is located on the center side of the button unit base 361. It is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down from the peripheral edge of the gear cover 372 toward the operation unit base 320, the liquid comes into contact with the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor terminal 367a and an electrical failure such as a short circuit occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

  In this embodiment, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, but an upright wall is provided on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 so as to stand upright in the direction perpendicular to the button unit base 361. The entire circumference of the operation button lift drive motor 367 may be covered. With this configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, the liquid enters the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as failure of the computer.

  Although the example in which the standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is shown, a part of the periphery of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367 may be covered by the standing wall. For example, you may make it cover at least the back side of the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367 with a standing wall. Further, the standing wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 and the peripheral edge of the button unit base 361 are closest to each other. Further, with respect to the portion where the operation button lifting drive motor terminal 367a is provided, a standing wall may be provided so as to cover at least a portion corresponding to the operation button lifting drive motor terminal 367a. On the other hand, when the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor terminal 367a is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face the center side of the button unit base 361, a standing wall corresponding to the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor terminal 367a is provided. It may not be possible. With this configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, the liquid enters the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as failure of the computer. Furthermore, compared with the case where a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, it is possible to improve the heat dissipation of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

  The substrate box 391 has a rectangular outer appearance, and is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 so that the long side faces the left-right direction. The substrate box 391 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  The rear surface of the operation unit relay board 392 is used for connection to various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and to the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. A plurality of operation unit relay board connector portions 392a are provided. The board box 391 is provided with a board box opening 391b at a position corresponding to the operation part relay board connector part 392a in a shape in which a plane forming the rear side of the board box 391 is cut out. The shape of the board box opening 391b is a shape that matches the shape of the operation part relay board connector part 392a, and specifically, a square or rectangular shape. Also, through the board box opening 391b, various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and connectors provided at the ends of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are provided. It is connected to the operation part relay board connector part 392a.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391b is provided in such a shape as to cut out the plane that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391. However, the substrate box opening 391b stands upright from the entire periphery of the substrate box opening 391b toward the rear. A waterproof wall 391c may be provided. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391, a situation in which the liquid flows into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c occurs. It becomes possible to deter.

  Although the modified example in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided from the entire periphery of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 toward the rear is shown, the portion where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening. Instead of the entire periphery of the portion 391b, only a part of the periphery may be used. For example, at least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided at the periphery corresponding to the upper half region of the substrate box opening 391b, or the upper side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. At least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided at the periphery, or at least the waterproof wall 391c may not be provided at the periphery corresponding to the lower side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the liquid flows into the substrate box 391. Further, the connector can be easily attached and detached at the board box opening 391b.

  Although the modification which provides the waterproof wall 391c toward the back from the periphery of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 has been shown, the portion where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening. It is good also as parts other than the periphery of 391b. For example, the waterproof wall 391c may be provided at a position separated from the substrate box opening 391b. Further, one waterproof wall 391c may be provided so as to suppress the inflow of liquid into the plurality of substrate box openings 391b. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391, a situation in which the liquid flows into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c occurs. It becomes possible to deter. Further, the connector can be easily attached and detached at the board box opening 391b.

  Further, the waterproof wall 391c may be formed in a straight line so that the waterproof wall 391c goes downward as it goes rightward or leftward. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391, a situation in which the liquid flows into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c occurs. It becomes possible to deter. Furthermore, since the waterproof wall 391c is provided with an inclination, the liquid flowing down can be guided to the right or left, and the liquid flowing down from other articles below the waterproof wall 391c can be kept away. Is possible.

  The operation unit relay board 392 is attached at a position between various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 in the front-rear direction. . With this configuration, the length of the wiring connecting the various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and the operation unit relay board 392, and the operation unit relay board 392 and the dish unit relay are set. It is possible to shorten the total extension with the length of the wiring connecting the substrate 214.

  The board box 391 is attached so that the distance between the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the clearance between the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operation portion 302 is set in the front-rear direction in the effect operation unit 300. It has been. The substrate box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. With this configuration, when the liquid enters the clearance between the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b or the clearance between the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operation portion 302 in the rendering operation unit 300. However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 becomes a wall and the liquid flows down to the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320 so that the upper part thereof is inclined forward. By adopting such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in a plan view can be reduced as compared with the case where the substrate box 391 is mounted so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane, and the substrate box 391 flows down from above. The influence of the liquid can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the upper portion thereof is inclined forward, but the substrate box 391 is perpendicular to the horizontal plane. You may make it attach. By adopting such a configuration, the substrate box 391 in a plan view is compared with the case where the substrate box 391 is mounted so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane, or when the upper portion of the substrate box 391 is tilted forward. , And the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  Although the example in which the substrate box 391 is attached so as to be perpendicular to the horizontal plane on the rear surface of the main body portion 321 in the operation unit base 320, the substrate box 391 is attached so that the long side of the substrate box 391 faces in the vertical direction. May be. With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in plan view can be further reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a substrate box opening 391b is provided in a shape that cuts out a plane that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391, and various types of devices provided in the effect operation unit 300 through the substrate box opening 391b. The board, motor, sensor, etc. and the connector provided at the end of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are connected to the operation part relay board connector part 392a, but cover the board box 391. The substrate box cover 393 may be attached from behind the substrate box 391 so as to cover at least a part of the substrate box 391. The substrate box cover 393 is preferably formed in a planar shape that is parallel to the plane that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391. Further, it is desirable that the substrate box cover 393 has a certain distance between a plane that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391 and a planar portion that constitutes a part of the substrate box cover 393. Further, the substrate box cover 393 may be formed in a convex shape rearward so as to cover at least a part of the upper end, the left and right ends, and the lower end of the substrate box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters the operation unit relay board connector unit 392a.

  Although the modified example in which the board box cover 393 that covers the board box 391 is attached from the rear side of the board box 391 is shown, the operation unit relay board connector portion is formed in the gap formed between the board box 391 and the board box cover 393. You may make it accommodate the surplus part of the wiring connected to 392a. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which various wirings in the rendering operation unit 300 are contaminated by the flowing liquid.

  Although the modified example in which the substrate box cover 393 that covers the substrate box 391 is attached from the rear side of the substrate box 391 is shown, a protruding substrate box cover liquid that guides the liquid flowing down to the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 in the left-right direction. The guiding portion 393a may be provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393. Specifically, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a may be formed in a straight line so that the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a goes downward as it goes rightward or leftward. In addition, on the back of the substrate box cover 393, two straight substrate box cover liquid guiding portions 393a are provided in a convex mountain shape so as to distribute the liquid flowing down in the right direction and the left direction. It may be. Although the example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a is inclined rightward or leftward is shown, the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a may be provided in parallel to the left-right direction. With such a configuration, the liquid that has flowed down to the substrate box cover 393 can be kept away from the portion in the gaming machine 1 where the liquid is not desired to flow down.

  Although an example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a is provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 has been described, the substrate box cover 393 is replaced with or in addition to the substrate box cover liquid guiding part 393a as described above. The device itself may be provided with a stepped portion, and the liquid may be guided by the stepped portion.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected.
Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs.
The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415.
The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415.
The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs.
The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward most, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for lighting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  The upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 for connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4 the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and in the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front face of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

[Countermeasures against electrostatic noise]
By the way, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of control boards including the main control board 1310 are mounted, and the game control, the effect control, and the like are performed by cooperation of these control boards via the command output from the main control board 1310. Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since many electronic components such as a CPU that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise are mounted on these control boards, the influence of electromagnetic noise is eliminated in order to guarantee a stable game operation without malfunction. Is very important.

  Various sources of electromagnetic noise are conceivable, but a game ball is a noise source that is unique to a game machine using a game ball as a game medium such as a ball game machine and has the greatest influence. In other words, game balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above each gaming machine by the gaming island equipment, and after being used for gaming in the gaming machine, they are collected again on the gaming island. Static electricity is generated due to friction between game balls, friction between game balls and passage walls, or the like. And the electromagnetic wave noise generate | occur | produces by the discharge from the charged game ball, and it will have a bad influence on electronic components, such as CPU.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 is where the largest number of game balls serving as noise generation sources are supplied and concentrated. Next is a tank rail 553 that guides the game ball from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580. That is, it is considered that the amount of static electricity accumulated in the ball tank 552 is the largest. Therefore, it is considered to be a good idea to remove static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552. In addition, in order to realize more stable gaming operations, in addition to measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic noise due to such an instantaneous discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic noise is generated, electronic components can be generated accordingly. Measures that can eliminate the adverse effects of are also desired.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69), The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the ground fitting 782 and the ground connector of the power supply board 851. As the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed. ”As described, the communication is performed with the CR unit 6. Each ground is once integrated on the power supply board 630 (see FIG. 95) disposed on the CR unit 6 side below the main body frame 4 of the gaming machine so that the power supply AC24V, which is a communication power supply, can be easily supplied. , It has been grounded through the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (a) is a block diagram showing a ground system of a conventional gaming machine showing this aspect. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), conventionally, static electricity generated in various places such as a ball tank 552, various control boards represented by the main control board 1310, an interface board 635 for interfacing with the CR unit 6, and the like. Once gathered in the power supply board 630, it was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the power supply board 630 and grounded.

  Since the power supply board 630 is generally heavy, it is often arranged below in gaming machines. Therefore, in order to consolidate in the ground power supply board 630, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank 552 or the payout device 580 in the upper part of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board 630. By drawing the ground wire in this way, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise is transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle and has an unexpected influence. In addition, since the ground wires are concentrated on the power supply board 630, if any problem occurs in the power supply board 630, the ground is affected. There was a risk of giving. Furthermore, when the grounding point of the island facility is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to connect the grounding wires collected by the power supply board 630 again from the lower side to the upper side.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the ball tank 552 that is supplied with the largest number of game balls and generates the most static electricity is configured to be grounded without going through the power supply board 630.
In addition, in order to quickly remove electricity, the sphere tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of the conductive filler mixed with the ABS resin), and the sphere tank 552 has been generated conventionally. Where the static electricity is connected to the ground through a tank rail or the like, the ball tank 552 is directly connected to the ground. Then, an earth circuit board 559 that exerts a neutralizing action is disposed in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate, separately from the power supply board 630, and the ball tank 552 and the earth circuit board 559 are connected by a ground wire. Furthermore, the earth circuit board 559 is connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a block diagram showing the ground system of the gaming machine of this embodiment. 202B, not only the ball tank 552 but also the interface board 635 that interfaces with the CR unit 6, the power supply board 630, etc., static electricity generated in various places is once aggregated in the earth circuit board 559, and the earth circuit It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the substrate 559 and grounded. Thus, the earth circuit board 559 plays a role of once collecting static electricity generated in various places. In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630, and the like, and the ground circuit board 559 are directly connected. The tank rail 553 for guiding the game ball is made of a transparent non-conductive resin. However, the tank rail 553 may be conductive and integrated with the ball tank 552. In this case, as has been conventionally done, it can be made conductive by providing a metal plate inside. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can be grounded, but if configured in this way, the ground path from the ball tank 552 and a plurality of paths of the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 are configured. Since there is a possibility that interference may occur between the two, it is desirable to ground at one point from an appropriate location.

  The earth metal fitting can be connected to a plurality of locations such as the side surface or the rear surface of the ball tank 552. Since the supply (falling) position of the game ball to the ball tank 552 varies depending on the island facilities installed on the game hall side, it is necessary to connect the ground wire for electrical connection. It is possible to change the position closer to that. The mounting position of the earth metal fitting is appropriately selected in the ball tank 552 and attached arbitrarily. Then, an earth circuit board 559 exhibiting a static eliminating action is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate.

  FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing static elimination as viewed from the obliquely rear side of the main body frame 4. FIG. 204 is a rear view of the storage case portion 551j storing the ground circuit board 559 as seen through from above, and FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. Further, FIG. 206 is an enlarged view of a main part mainly showing the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the payout base 551 is made permeable, and the payout base unit 550 is located on the right side of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551 and tank rail. Arranged above 553 is a case portion 558a in which circuit portions of an external terminal plate 558 made of a transparent resin case visible from the outside are aggregated, and a circuit portion (for example, a terminal portion of the external terminal plate 558) Both of the connecting portion between the back surface of the plate and the outside of the external terminal plate 558 are visible from the outside. In this example, the external terminal board 558 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its long side is arranged along the left-right direction of the main body frame 4. In this example, the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is arranged along the vertical direction of the main body frame 4, but the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is not limited to this. It may be inclined and arranged. An external terminal plate 558 (connection portion) is disposed on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

Also, a thin box-shaped storage case portion 551j made of a transparent resin that is visible inside is disposed above the inside of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and the inside of the storage case portion 551j performs static elimination. A ground circuit board 559 is stored with the back surface (solder surface) facing upward. For this reason, not only the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 but also the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558 and the back surface of the ground circuit board 559 and a later-described connector portion are provided so as to be easily visible from the outside. In this example, a transparent resin case allows visual recognition from the outside. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a hole (such as a slit or a groove) may be opened in the case that is not necessarily transparent. In addition to the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 from the hole portion, both the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558 and the back surface of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector portion described later can be easily visually recognized from the outside. Also good.
Further, if the payout base 551 is also formed of a transparent resin, the back surface (solder surface) of the external terminal board 558 can be viewed from the inside when the game board is removed. The storage case portion 551j may be formed separately or integrally with the payout base 551.

  Since the ground circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, the payout base unit 550 or the external device included therein can be simply removed by removing the gaming board. The terminal board 558 and the earth circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At that time, the external terminal board 558 and the ground circuit board 559 are located near the upper left when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, so that it is necessary to open the door greatly when trying to perform an illegal act. It becomes difficult to attach an unauthorized electrical element to the ground circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is performed, it is easy to find out that an unauthorized act is being performed from the outside.

[Fixed aspect of ball tank 552]
A fixing mode of the ball tank 552 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. The ball tank 552 is attached to the left side of the upper back surface of the dispensing base 551 having permeability with screws. In this example, laterally protruding mounting portions 552a and 552b are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper portion of the front portion of the ball tank 552 that contacts the mounting surface to the payout base 551. Then, screws are fixed to the payout base 551 with respect to the attachment portions 552a and 552b from the rear of the main body frame 4, respectively.

  Further, the ball tank 552 includes a mounting portion 552c formed by a boss projectingly formed at substantially the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss formed projecting side by side in the front-rear direction at the rear of the right side in the rear view of the ball tank 552. The mounting portion 552d of the tank rail 553 and the mounting portion 552e of the ground metal fitting are provided.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the attachment portions 552c and 552d of the ball tank 552 by being screwed from below. Further, in this example, a ground metal fitting connected to one end of a ground wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank from below by a metal screw (not shown).

[Attachment mode of earth fitting in ball tank 552]
In this example, the mounting portion 552e of the earth fitting of the ball tank 552 is provided exclusively for the other mounting portions, but is not necessarily limited to being provided independently. It can also be shared with the mounting part. Each example is given below.

  For example, in the case where the supply points of game balls from the island facilities installed on the game hall side are concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. Static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the left side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, a grounding metal fitting may be fastened to the attachment base 551 with a metal screw at the attachment portion 552a.

  Further, for example, the supply points of game balls from the island facilities installed on the game hall side are concentrated in the central part inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. In some cases, static electricity is most likely to accumulate in the central portion of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the grounding metal fitting may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw on the mounting portion 552c.

  Further, for example, in the case where the supply points of game balls from the island facilities installed on the game hall side are concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. Static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In addition to the game ball entry location, the right side of the ball tank 552 may easily accumulate static electricity due to the collection of a large number of statically charged game balls. Furthermore, since the tank rail 553 includes the ball rectifying members 556 that align the game balls in a line so as not to overlap each other, the game balls can be easily stopped. In such a case, the grounding metal fitting may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw on the mounting portion 552d.

  FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case unit 551j of the dispensing base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing static elimination as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 includes five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, the other end of the grounding wire 5591 for discharging which is connected to the ball tank 552 having one end made of a conductive resin is connected to the connector CN13. It should be noted that a plurality of ground connection bosses are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball tank 552 so as to be able to cope with changes in the arrangement configuration due to an increase in each main effect device arranged in the lower part of the ball tank 552. In order to cope with the cause of generation of static electricity, it is desirable that the bosses for ground connection are provided in a state of being separated from each other.

  In addition, the other end of the ground wire 5592 for static elimination that is connected at one end to a main body frame metal member provided on the main body frame 4 is connected to the connector CN14. In addition, it may be connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 with a grounding metal fitting for grounding, and a ground connector terminal may be provided by separately providing a connector CN16 (not shown) on the ground circuit board. In this case, as shown in a circuit diagram of FIG. 205 to be described later, it may be connected in parallel to CN 13 or CN 14.

  One end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Furthermore, the other end of the ground wire 5595 having one end connected to the frame ground of the interface board 635 is connected to the connector CN11. The frame ground of the interface board 635 is electrically connected to a casing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is stored via a predetermined wiring, and noise current from the casing in which the CR unit 6 is stored. Is connected to the earth circuit board 559 via the frame ground of the interface board 635 and the earth wire 5595. One end of a ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. The entire gaming machine is grounded by connecting the other end of the ground wire 5594 to the ground provided in the island facility (gaming machine facility) where the gaming machine 1 is installed.

  FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. One end of the ground resistor ER1 is connected to one end of the connection line from the connector CN13 to which the ground line 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected. In addition, one end of the ground resistor ER2 is connected to one end of the connection line from the connector CN14 to which the ground wire 5592 connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4 is connected. That is, it is electrically connected to a portion where static electricity is accumulated via an earth resistor ER1 (in this example, a resistance value of 510Ω as an example), and by gradually introducing the static electricity to the ground of the gaming machine equipment, it is gradually discharged. Suppresses the instantaneous discharge of static electricity.

  In addition, the other end of the earth resistor ER1 and the other end of the earth resistor ER2 are connected, and the subsequent stage of the connection point on the earth resistor ER1 side is bifurcated. One of the branches is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board). The other branched part is connected to the connector CN12 (island facility). The subsequent stage of the connection point on the ground resistance ER2 side is connected to the connector CN11 (interface board).

  Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface board 635 through the casing in which the CR unit 6 is stored is small, the ground wire 5595 is a thin ground wire compared to the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. The connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is also smaller than other connectors (see FIG. 204).

  As described above, the earth circuit board 559 having the earth resistors ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the storage case portion 551j, and one end of the earth resistor ER1 provided on the earth circuit board 559 is connected to the ball tank 552. A wire is connected to suppress instantaneous discharge of a high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise via the earth resistor ER1. In addition, an earth wire connected to the body frame metal member of the body frame 4 is connected to one end of the earth resistor ER2, and the instantaneous discharge of high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise is suppressed through the earth resistor ER2. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 205, static electricity at each location is connected to the connector CN12 (island facility) at one point at one point so that the static electricity is released by one system. For example, it is possible to take the ground wire from the ball tank 552 and simultaneously take the ground wire from the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552. Static electricity is directly connected to the connector CN12 (island facility) and two systems are connected via the ball guidance unit 570. Therefore, the static electricity from each route interferes with each other and can be grounded well. There is a risk of disappearing.

  In addition, since static electricity generated at various places is once concentrated on the ground circuit board 559 disposed on the upper back surface of the main body frame 4, the static electricity is temporarily applied to the power supply board 630 disposed on the lower back surface of the main body frame 4 as in the past. The wiring of the ground wiring is simpler than those to be consolidated.

  Since the earth circuit board 559 and the external terminal board 558 are brought close to each other and are disposed on the upper right side of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the back side, the earth wire 5594 from the earth circuit board 559 is connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility. It becomes easy to simultaneously perform the operation of the connection and the connection of the output wiring from the external terminal board 558 to the island facility, and the workability is improved.

  Then, the ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the ground resistor ER2 toward the gaming machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further drawn to the outside from the rear surface of the storage case portion 551j. Then, the drawn out ground wire 5594 is connected to the ground prepared in the game hall facility, so that the entire gaming machine is grounded. In this way, the length of the ground wire 5591 that connects the ball tank 552 that is likely to accumulate static electricity and the ground circuit board 559 that exhibits a static elimination action is configured to be shorter than the other ground wires.

Further, the ground lines are gathered on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground line 5594 drawn from the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559 is directly connected to the ground 6000 of the island equipment, so that the power supply board 630 is connected. Can be grounded without passing through. For this reason, even if any problem occurs in the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to reduce the influence on the ground.
Conversely, since the grounding is conventionally performed through the power supply board 630, there is a possibility that the operation of the power supply board 630 may be affected when a large amount of current flows through the grounding wire. Such a fear can be avoided by grounding without the power supply board 630 interposed therebetween.

  In the embodiment, the earth resistance between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the earth circuit board 559 and between the connector CN14 (main body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment), respectively. Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a ground resistance. Since the earth resistance is provided to prevent a current from flowing suddenly at the time of earthing, it may be provided according to a predicted generated voltage. The connector CN11 (interface board) and the connector CN12 (island) are provided as necessary. Equipment) and connector CN15 (power supply board) can also be provided with resistors having appropriate resistance values. In addition, a ground resistor having an appropriate size may be provided in front of the connector CN12 (island facility), so that a common resistor for grounding static electricity generated in each part can be used. It is also possible to perform grounding with an appropriate amount of current without providing a grounding resistance by adjusting.

  The ground circuit board 559 is housed inside the housing case portion 551j with the back surface (solder surface) of the board facing up, and is disposed so as to be visible from the outside of the dispensing unit base 550. For this reason, even if an unauthorized electrical element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately detected by visual inspection. Also, on the lower substrate surface, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island facility) of the ground circuit substrate 559, the connector CN14 (main body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island facility) are connected. Between each connection, earth resistances ER1 and ER2 are provided, which are also attached in a state that is visible from the outside. Further, in order to prepare for an unexpected situation such as looseness of the connector, the storage case portion 551j may be removable from the dispensing unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be removable from the storage case portion 551j.

  In addition, hooking portions (for example, hooks) that hook the ground wire are provided at a plurality of locations on the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and after the ground wire is hooked on these hooking portions, It is good also as a structure which connects a ground wire with a connector. In this way, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the grounding wire itself due to the weight of the grounding wire and the influence on the connector caused by the wobbling when the grounding wire contacts other members, and the connection can be stabilized.

Since the ball tank 552 is made of resin, as shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 80, a game ball is stored in the ball tank 552 or a ball collides from above, so that the bottom of the ball tank 552 If the bottom part of the ball tank 552 is bent, the ball tank 552 does not come into contact with the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551. A gap is formed so as to avoid. Further, by providing the gap, an impact when a game ball is thrown into the ball tank 552 from the island facility is not transmitted to the member below it.
Further, in the ball tank 552, when grounding from the mounting portion 552a provided on the left side and connecting to the ground circuit board 559, the ground wire connecting the mounting portion 552a and the ground circuit board 559 is connected to this gap. It is better to configure to pass through.

  As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 1500 is positioned below the ball tank 552 in a state where the game board 5 is fitted and attached to the main body frame 4. Note that the peripheral control unit 1500 has an electric drive source for driving the liquid crystal display device 1600 and other movable items for production, and therefore easily generates heat. Therefore, flame retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, there is an effect that the weight can be reduced as compared with the peripheral control board box 1520 made of metal.

  Peripheral control board box 1520 of peripheral control unit 1500 is made of polycarbonate (conductive filler having a high content), which is a conductive resin having a lower electrical resistance than ABS resin constituting ball tank 552. For example, increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the conductivity is higher in the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 than in the ball tank 552. The peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to static electricity is housed inside.

  The peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the main body frame metal member by a ground wire via a grounding metal fitting (not shown) to the ground circuit board 559 and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 by a ground wire 5592. ing. For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to suppress electromagnetic noise generated by static electricity discharge and to quickly remove static electricity so as not to be easily affected by the electromagnetic noise. Further, since the polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, the self-extinguishing property (strong to high temperature) of the polycarbonate can suppress the influence of heat transfer on the main control unit 1300 disposed below the polycarbonate.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the abutment pressing portion that abuts and presses the ball supply lever that operates to open the game ball on the island facility side in a direction to supply the game ball to the ball tank 552. Is formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552. In this example, a protrusion projecting outward is provided on the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion forming the peripheral wall of the sphere tank 552 (see the side and rear portions of the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). For this reason, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side. Note that the ball stop member 557 is disposed inward of a recess (not shown) formed in the payout base 551, and does not protrude rearward as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unexpected contact with the ball stop member 557.

  As described above, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 that is attached to the left of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will soon flow down.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 has a box-like upper full base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full base 601 and opened at the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150 By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings.
Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Are discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank pass unit 610, and is filled with a full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball removal movable piece 592 It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 in front view. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97).
The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached.
The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game is performed to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 that is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the start that becomes the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, a starting port unit 2100, A frame-shaped center that is attached above the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. Is provided with a thing 2500, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010. A plurality of back production units 3100.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the path unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 so as to be detachable and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through-hole 1121 through which the inside penetrates in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 faces forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, and the general winning opening through the panel relay board 3031. The sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 displays a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003 and a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs, and a normal retention indicator 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port. A first special hold number display 1405 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving the game ball B in 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reserve number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second starting port 2004. And.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. A display 1408 is provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image. ing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is inserted. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end passes through the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction.

  The front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1008. The start unit 2100 has one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port The unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the side unit 2200 having two general winning ports 2001, and to the right side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 having two general winning ports 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a. And a table effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

  The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large size. A large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result lottered by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port. And an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to 2004.

  The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a and slightly above the center in front view, and is a panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. It is attached to the front of the. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Thus, the game ball B can be released from these parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (top) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right side and the upper side of the right side of the upper surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called right-hand hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the big winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

  The table effect unit 2600 is not shown in detail, but according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move and emit light are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The front effect unit 2600 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403, then sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010. And a rear production unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the right side in the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and the liquid crystal mounting A notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the up-down direction on the left side of the portion 3010b in the back view.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like.

  The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, This relay is used to relay the connection with the start sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

  Although the back production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move and emit light are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail in FIG. 102, but as shown in FIG. 154, the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly connected to the main control board 1310. The magnetic sensor 3003, the big prize opening sensor 2403, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the start opening solenoid 2404, and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. Also good. A detailed description of the control configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I / O device). A main control I / O port, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a RAM built in the main control MPU Are provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the stored information and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the big winning opening 2005 Detection signals from the big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting B, the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a (which will be described as a magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the following), etc. Input via / O port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. From the main control I / O port, the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal hold display 1403, the first special symbol display 1404, the first special hold number display 1405, the second special A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special reservation number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, Is notified (specifically, an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number “5” is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, That is in click "(specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined payout non game ball B) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and other sounds can be played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In the vibration speaker 354, as with other speakers, sound information that changes to vibration is extracted from the sound ROM based on the control data from the peripheral control MPU using the sound source IC and used in combination with the push button effect. Is done. For example, the player operates the stage operation unit 301 in response to “Press the button !!” displayed on the effect display device 1600 or “Press the button!” Sounded from a speaker that generates voice. At this time, using the sound information that changes to vibration to the vibration speaker, the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 is viewed as a vibration plate, and the vibration of the vibration speaker is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the production operation unit 301 was shaken.

  Here, the vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information and vibrate the production operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variation in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) eight times in one cycle for about 1 second in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently performed by sweeping for 1 second and inputting again after 1 second.

For inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clear process as shown in steps S16 to S36 in the flowchart of FIG. Like to do as.
In the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the information stored in the main control board 1310 and the information stored in the payout control board 633 are stored and held in the same manner when the power is turned off.
Specifically, a capacitor that stores electric charge during energization is connected to a power supply terminal for a RAM built in the CPU, and power is supplied by the electric charge stored in the capacitor when the power is shut off.

Here, when the gaming machine is shipped, there is a case where the energization is not sufficiently performed, the electric charge is not stored in the capacitor, and the RAM becomes indefinite. Then, when the power is supplied in a state where no electric charge is stored in the capacitor, the RAM is abnormal because the checksum value and the backup flag value recorded when the power is shut off do not exist as normal values. It is determined. In that case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and transmits a RAM clear notification command to the sub-control board as a command related to the state when the power is turned on. When the sub control board receives the RAM clear notification sound command, the sub control board repeats the notification regarding the RAM clear for a predetermined period, for example, 90 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the vibration speaker is checked using this RAM clear notification period.
When the push button is operated when the CPU of the sub-control board is in the RAM clear notification state, as described above, a 40 Hz ± 2 Hz sine wave signal (38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz unit for each cycle) As a result, change (sweep) about 8 times per second). This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, then repeatedly inputting after 1 second, and controlling to input to the vibration speaker for a predetermined period.

  In the first place, information is stored in the RAM as collateral when a power failure occurs temporarily when the player is in an advantageous state, for example, during a big hit or during probability fluctuation. Conversely, in order to maintain fairness among players in the event that a probability change state occurs just before the store closes or a situation occurs where the player has to stop playing the game in a probability change state due to the convenience of the player, A RAM clear function is provided as a function for setting the state to the initial state. When the RAM clear button is pressed when power is supplied, a series of processes in the above-described RAM clear are executed even when it is determined that the button is pressed. Therefore, even if the operation of the vibration speaker is confirmed during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub control board suddenly shifts to the operation confirmation state of the vibration speaker unless the RAM is consciously cleared during normal business. There is nothing.

Note that the sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in this embodiment has six sound output terminals to which speakers can be connected, and the sound set for each channel is mixed by the built-in mixer, and each speaker is mixed. Is output via the connected audio output terminal.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set. For the vibration speaker, one of the plural audio output terminals is set as an audio output terminal dedicated to the vibration speaker. ing.

In addition, since the sound signal in the normal speaker and the signal for vibration in the vibration speaker are both in the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for signal generation. However, since the respective functions and purposes are different, it is preferable to separate the audio output terminal used for audio and the audio output terminal used as a vibration generation source in order to avoid confusion between the two. If set in this way, for example, when it is desired to reduce the volume all at once, the volume adjustment can be collectively managed using a main volume, which will be described later, but even in such a case, It is possible to control voice and vibration separately so that control can be performed without narrowing down the effects produced by the vibration speakers generated at the same timing.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serial inputs different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or based on the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the effect drive board outputs a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B is placed in the obstacle nail. As a result, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side as viewed from the front of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and forwards from either the top of the center in the left-right direction or the troughs on the left and right sides of the top. Released. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the top at the center of the stage 2503, the top is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with high probability. . When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is released into the game area 5a from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center object 2500 into the game area 5a are the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. May be accepted in the general prize opening 2001 or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 moves it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the start There is a possibility that the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, etc. of the mouth unit 2100 will be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , And is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. This part is provided with a gate part 2003 and a second start port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B hit right is passed through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start opening that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls B that have been drawn “normal hit” in the gate unit 2003 are received in the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) In addition, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is drawn by lottery. Special lottery results include “Lost”, “Small Bonus”, “2R Big Bonus”, “5R Big Bonus”, “15R Big Bonus”, “Per Probability (Probability Change)”, “Short Time (Time Reduction)”, “ "Short-term accuracy change" Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 appropriately uses each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like. It is possible to perform a moving effect or the like, it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
In the present embodiment, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is in the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are in the storage tray of the present invention, and the rendering operation in the rendering operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the unit cover unit 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention. The lower central decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 is the second decorative part of the present invention, and the upper central decorative board 314 and the lower central decorative board 316 of the present embodiment are the decorative light emitting means of the present invention. The production operation ring decoration board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in the embodiment are used as the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention. Corresponding to that.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that is closed so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The plate unit 200 including the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that can store the swell is swelled forward, and the front end of the plate unit 200 is approximately ½ the length of the full width of the door frame base 101. Is provided with a production operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a central pressing operation unit 303a concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310, and an outer periphery pressing operation. A unit 303b and a rotation operation unit 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface is provided below the door window 101a where the inside of the game area 5a is visible. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the dish unit 200 (production operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appealed to the player Power can be raised and it can be made easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly protruded forward under the door frame 3, the production operation unit cover unit 310 is moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. In addition, the length of the production operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or places his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire production operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player has the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier to notice, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes greatly forward from below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is displayed. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 according to the gaming state, and the presentation operation When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the central button decoration substrate 376, and the outer button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, so that the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated. The player's line of sight is directed toward the unit front cover 312 and the direction operation unit 301 below by the light emitting decoration. It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Accordingly, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated to decorate the player so that the player is directed below the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area 5a, By changing the body, etc., the player can be surprised and given a strong impact, the player can be entertained, and the player may think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the player can be surprised by making the unit front cover 312 illuminate and decorate according to the gaming state, and changing the effect in the gaming area 5a in the gap. Then, the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player the arrival of an opportunity (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). Thereby, since a premium feeling can be given to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light emission. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she will look away from the pachinko machine 1, so the entire gaming machine including the gaming area Becomes easier to see. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200, the presence of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized to strongly attract the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played with an increased appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both the player's hands can be easily extended forward, so the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be facilitated, and it is difficult for the player to be stressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the semicircular arc shaped cross section of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b disposed above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is expanded outward. Since it is made to extend in a semi-annular shape, the half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline of interest, and it is difficult to get injured even if the player touches at first glance. It can be recognized that the game is safe, and a reduction in interest in the game can be suppressed by reassuring the player.

  In addition, by simultaneously decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward and below the door window 101a. Since the whole can be decorated with light emission, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole light emission decoration does not have anything good for the player. The player's interest can be directed to the directing operation unit 301 and the operation can be urged, and the player can operate the directing operation unit 301 to entertain and entertain the player participation type effect. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-doughnut shape, so that the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 are arranged on the center of the dish according to the gaming state. If the decoration body 312a and the whole dish lower center decoration body 312b are light-decorated, the player can show a light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. Surprisingly, it can be thought that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is replaced with the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as the direction in which the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which the light moves up and down by alternately decorating the upper and lower central dish 312a and the lower central dish 312b. At the same time, the player can be prompted to press the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b or the center pressing operation portion 303a by the light that moves up and down. Therefore, the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately decorating the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to entertain the player participatory effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 extends forward from the side (outside the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The side in which three side window decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on the flat door frame right side unit 410 protruding. Since the window 410a is formed and, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for lighting decoration of the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off, the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the interior decoration portion 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily viewed through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. A game can be performed in the game area 5a, the game can be enjoyed by the player, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 in which the left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is hingedly rotated by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the hinge axis, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, it is difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as seen by other players. By making it difficult to receive the feeling, it is possible to play the game without hesitation of other players. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined gaming state, the LEDs on the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window decoration parts 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window The visibility through the side window 410a is changed by dazzling the inside of 410a. At this time, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light can be emitted in a band shape and a radial shape, and the side window decoration portions 410b are dazzled, making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from the middle. In addition, the player's line of sight can be directed to the side window decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window decoration part 410b, and the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished. The visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player or the like to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an opportunity for the player to be advantageous, the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light, and the side due to the glare Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, other players will be worried about it and will not be able to devote themselves to the game, so it will cause discomfort, or a mistake will be induced to make you feel lost Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed by making the game enjoyable. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, in the side window 410a, the three side window decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so that the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window decorations 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window decorations 410b are not emitting light, the side windows 410a pass through the space between the three side window decorations 410b. A player who can visually recognize (in the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play, moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. Even without this, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily found.

  In addition, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window decoration portion 410b having a certain height is caused to emit light, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult to visually recognize from other players through the side window 410a, so that the specific side window decoration part 410b of the three side window decoration parts 410b is caused to emit light according to the gaming state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward is provided with side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, and the side windows 410a are In the state of ensuring visibility, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a. It is easy to find out that fraudulent acts are being carried out from the end of the game area 5a, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side that is farther from the left side that is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and maintenance or game board 5 is exchanged, the door frame 3 can be made difficult to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

  Further, since the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light according to the gaming state, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value, the side window interior decoration portion 410b may be caused to emit light or be extinguished. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., when the expected value is low, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is made to emit light so that it is difficult for other players to look into it, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state When it is not done (in the case of “losing”), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side-window interior decoration portion 410b is not caused to emit light or is extinguished, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easy for other players to look into (a “big hit”). ) So that it does not create an awkward atmosphere and can suppress the decline of interest, and it can also create an atmosphere that other players support, enhancing the player's interest in games. You can make the game more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the three side window decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value), the three side window decorations 410b may emit light sequentially (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to the top and bottom sides, etc.) The specific side window decoration part 410b may emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of reach production or reach development production, etc. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to look into the game and to suggest an expected value, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition to light emission (lighting) and light extinction, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above are different in flashing pattern, light emission color, and light emission color change (for example, from a cold blue to hot Change of feeling to red, change of blue, yellow, red, etc. imitating traffic signals), or change of brightness (luminance), etc. Thus, the decorative property of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Therefore, conversely, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the advantageous game state for the player depending on the light emission mode such as the presence or absence of light emission and the light emission pattern of the three side window decorations 410b. The possibility (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the player can be suggested, so that the player is excited depending on how the three side window decorations 410b emit light during the performance. -It can be throbbing, and it can increase the player's expectation and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the three side window decorations 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or be turned off. . As a result, for example, when the possibility of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player during a reach production or a reach development production is low (so-called expected value), the production operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to cause the side window interior decoration part 410b to emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeping, so when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere due to being seen by other players, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is not operated to prevent the side window decoration unit 410b from emitting light. By doing so (or by turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if it is peeped by other players, an advantageous gaming state will be generated, so that it does not become an awkward atmosphere and the interest is lowered. In addition to being able to be suppressed, it is possible to create an atmosphere that other players are cheering on, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

  In addition, the timing, light emission mode, and the like of the three side window decorations 410b may be set by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, in the default state set in advance, the timing specific to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the production operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's game can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal. Assuming that the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is not allowed to flow to the ball removal passage 580b by the ball removal movable piece 592. Then, it will flow to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a and can be sent to the payout blade 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball removal lever 593 is raised (unlocked) to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream becomes the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b, and may be discharged outside the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side via the ball removal passage 580b. it can. Since the payout vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not rotatable (first state) by the ball pulling lever 593 in a normal state. On the upstream side of the payout vane 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a daisy chain.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B upstream from the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removal movable piece 592. Since the game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game balls B upstream from the payout blade 589 is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball removal movable piece 592 that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is not damaged. This can reduce the damage to the ball pulling movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the breakage of the ball pulling movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592. If it is in the state (second state), the game ball B that is in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 flows over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b side. Become. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will soon flow down. In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed opens and closes around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The body frame 4 that is attached is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axis core on the left side with respect to the body frame 4. In the state where the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable and closable (rotatable by hinges) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel. The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 and the like on the main body frame 4 side, and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300 and the like on the door frame 3 side are connected. Connection cable The cable 503 extends from the portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 to the shaft core side and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 is further extended to the vicinity of the shaft center after being held by the guide body 502a, and then folded back and extended away from the shaft core. The frame 3 is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, and then is attached to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is connected.

  Then, when the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hinged about the left side axial center so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since the part of the connection cable 503 that extends from the door frame 3 moves forward away from the main body frame 4 because it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the attachment shaft 502c that is far from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4. As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side close to the axial center of the connection cable guide member 502 projects into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the shaft core, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are not easily disturbed.

  In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the distal end portion from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably attached to the shaft core side, the proximal end portion of the guide member is attached as in the conventional pachinko machine. Compared with the case of extending away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position close to the lower hinge pin 126 and the part where the connection cable 503 is folded back can be set to a position that does not easily get in the way.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the opposite direction, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, when performing maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly and interrupted for maintenance. An increase in the interruption time of the game being played can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the front end of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and is folded back and extends away from the shaft core is positioned closer to the shaft core than the front end of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the cable holder 103a holds it on the door frame 3 side, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a about the axis. Since the tangent passing through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is equal to or less than the angle intersecting the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis of the connection cable guide member 502 is extended to the door frame 3 An angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface can be prevented. In addition, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 on the door frame 3 side, When 3 is closed, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the axial center side by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

  Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 cannot be closed, or the connection cable guide It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality such that the leading end of the member 502 comes into contact with the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is disconnected. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs that requires maintenance by opening and closing the door frame 3 during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. This can be performed smoothly, and an increase in the game interruption time can be reduced to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed, the position is closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 (the axis is more than the cable holder 103a). (A position near the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103) that can be pressed to the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting the connection cable 503. A portion protruding rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the frame piece 502b is provided on each of the two long sides of the guide body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is enhanced, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more wires can be guided. Since it becomes possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the structure concerning the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the binding bands 504 in the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 in a state where the connection cable 503 is attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the operation of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 that has passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from being detached from the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by detaching the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. Can be avoided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is below the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the assembly 40 communicates with the space between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a (curtain plate internal space 40a), the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side define the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 622 of 622 can be sufficiently secured, a heavy bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player can be entertained by the sound of the heavy bass to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can do. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 that holds a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501 h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body in the main body frame 4 passes through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion slot 501b of the frame base 501 can be viewed from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port is formed at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end, which is opposite to the member 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4 and covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 through the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front are the speaker attachment portions of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate inner space 40a constituted by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. And is radiated from the port member 47 to the player side ahead. At this time, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is constituted by the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40. The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extension in the low frequency range can be output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front. Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are provided in the enclosure 624. ) In the depth direction (front-rear direction) at the connecting portion to the connecting portion), the width in the front-rear direction of the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c is increased, and the interior of the speaker unit 620a is increased. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of sound from the space toward the curtain plate internal space 40a side of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed, 47 can output a sound obtained by amplifying bass. Then, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are combined by interfering with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing the volume. It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and to make the player enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in the port member 47 and radiated forward (forms a so-called bass reflex type speaker), the main body When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phase of each other is the same, so the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the sound volume increases. Compared with the case of using a passive radiator, the sound output can be increased with a simple configuration.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are disposed below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, their vertical dimensions can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is performed is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1.
From this, it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is lower than the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501 b in the main body frame 4. Since the vertical dimension on the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. In addition to being able to output a richer sound of bass, it is possible to entertain the sound to the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Moreover, since the connection cylinder part 43a and the connection part 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connection part 621c abuts against the connection cylinder part 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained. Also, since sliding resistance does not occur between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 is heavy. In addition, a decrease in workability during maintenance or the like can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the space between the connection cylinder part 43a and the connection part 621c is sealed by the seal member 48, sound leakage in the enclosure 624 can be prevented between the connection cylinder part 43a and the connection part 621c. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 with a wider game area 5a. The wide game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the game area 5a can be widened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous so that the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting part 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are 2 (pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, so that the sound can be amplified near the player sitting in front of pachinko machine 1, and as described above, On the other hand, you can hear a rich bass sound.

  Further, as described above, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is amplified by causing interference in the vicinity of the player. The player will receive an unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player who is playing with this pachinko machine 1 will be able to hear a sound with a large volume and a rich low tone, thereby increasing the expectation of the game. Can be made. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player who is playing with another pachinko machine to hear that the sound from the pachinko machine 1 is heard, so that it is suggested that an opportunity or the like is suggested in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 uncomfortable and lowers interest. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the position of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center, 4, a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the player's interest is strongly attracted.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the lower side of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the middle, the game ball B is discharged to that space. And a ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game media balls, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with them can be obtained. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion that protrudes upward from the upper surface to the dish unit 200 that bulges forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed. 303a, an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a, and an annular rotation operation surrounding the outer periphery of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b Since the upper part of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 are seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the part 302 is disposed so that the front end side of the upper face is lowered. The head (face) is directed in a certain direction, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically so that the whole image can be easily seen. Three large operation units (press operation unit 303 and rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, can have a strong impact on the player, and the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine This makes it possible to recognize at a glance that an operation unit having a different form from the above is provided, and to differentiate this pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and attract the player's attention strongly. Can do. In addition, since the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are conspicuous, a game for operating the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 with respect to the player. The expectation for the player participation type effect can be increased, and the game is advanced so that the game state in which the player participation type effect is executed (in this case, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). In addition, the player participation type effect can be made easier to participate when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly protruded from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the lifting mechanism including the operation button lifting drive motor 367 according to the game state (lowering position). ) And a protruding position (upward position) protruding upward from the retracted position, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 at the retracted position. Since the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is not accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation portion 303a can be surely pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the interest can be reduced. It is possible to control.

  Furthermore, in the state of the retreat position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in a state incapable of pressing, and therefore there is an outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302. For this reason, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a to the moment when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the moment when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player participation type production can be surely enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  And by moving to a protrusion position, since the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b will protrude largely upwards on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b can be conspicuous, it can give a strong impact to the player, and it can give a premium feeling to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation part 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b. It can make you think that it is, and can raise the expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect in which the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this projecting position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotation operation portion 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation portion 303a has to be pressed, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed, or When the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b has to be pressed, the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, or both the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 has to be rotated, the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. Accordingly, when the player performs a pressing operation or a rotation operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. It is possible to give a sense of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, to make the player hard to get tired, and to entertain the player participation type effect that performs the pressing operation and the rotation operation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of a person.

  In addition, notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600 are provided, and in the player participation type effect, the player can perform a center pressing operation in a protruding position where the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is possible. If only the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by mistake when the portion 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, and the pressing operation is performed again. The center pressing operation portion 303a should be surely pressed, and the player can be entertained with the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected. It is possible to avoid feeling and to entertain a player participation type production and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the player thinks that the player correctly performs the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the response (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the center pressing operation portion 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion that the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, it is possible to correct the player's belief and correctly press the central pressing operation portion 303a to join the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate for storing the game balls B for bulging forward in the front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed are stored. An annular rotation operation unit 302 that is rotatable about an axis with the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and extending up and down, and an inner ring of the rotation operation unit 302. Are arranged with a central push operation portion 303a and an outer periphery push operation portion 303b, and the rotation operation portion 302 is changed according to a game state that is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation type effect that rotates the button or presses the pressing operation unit 303. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303 according to the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any one of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that are exposed to the outside. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when rotating by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to make the player difficult to get tired early and to rotate the rotation operation unit 302. The player participatory effect of rotating the operation unit 302 can be continuously enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations are requested from the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations in each, and it is possible to present more diverse and diverse player-participation-type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest Can do.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface of an operation cover (configured by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337) that is touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if it is rotated so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface. The rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated, and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded. Since it becomes easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Accordingly, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform the rotation operation at a minute rotation angle than the rotation operation unit with a small diameter like a conventional pachinko machine, Since the player's movement at the time of the game can be increased, the player can more feel that the rotary operation unit 302 is being rotated. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit can be realized. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape, and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, Can be rotated by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side, and the like, and thus the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated It is possible to more entertain the participatory production and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation can be sufficiently enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the section 302 can be made completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, an airplane control stick, or the like. Thereby, for example, when the rotation operation unit is configured like a steering wheel of an automobile, at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit, it is assumed that the player operates the rotation operation unit. The player can only perform operations such as handle handling, so when a player-participation-type production that requires a variety of rotation operations is performed, the player cannot perform a rotation operation different from the handle-type production. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in games will be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, an airplane control stick, etc., a preconception about how the rotation operation unit 302 is operated by the player. Can be wiped off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated according to the player's wishes, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are rotated. Thus, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated comfortably, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and playing in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5 An annular rotation operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having 202, and a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis to be rotated, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 34. To the sense rotation by detecting the detecting piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting the rotation on the entire lower side. In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). Part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation unit 302 is sufficient. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. An operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be disposed.
Then, in accordance with the gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative board By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) illuminated. It is possible to make the rotation operation unit 302 stand out and attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 A plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be caused to emit light (turn on / off) sequentially at the same speed in the same direction. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are illuminated and decorated, It is possible to make an illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so that the rotation speed is the same as that of the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, the player rotates with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 emits light even though the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be caused to emit light sequentially so that the player can show the light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the circular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and to facilitate the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and is rotated when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is disposed at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration relating to the rotation operation unit 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340) in the dish unit 200. Therefore, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

  Furthermore, an operation ring drive motor 342 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state is provided. The operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rotation is performed when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be reduced. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle. A feeling of clicking can be given.
Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. As described above, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to deal with a wider variety of player participation type effects. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to get bored, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operational feeling can be supported by light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, a space below the rotation operation unit 302 is easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be illuminated more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are each decorated with light emission in a favorable state by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the central button decoration substrate 376. Therefore, by making them emit light appropriately, only the rotation operation unit 302 is decorated with light emission, only the pressing operation unit 303 is decorated with light emission, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is decorated with light emission, and the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated and decorated, making it easy for the player to recognize the operation portion that the player wants to operate and entertaining the player participation type effect.

  In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that turns light by sequentially emitting light. It is possible to perform an effect in which an effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and an effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light sequentially. , Decorative decoration in which light is rotated in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the reverse direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 performs light emission decoration that rotates light in the reverse direction. Thus, since the player can show various effects by light emission, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, a peripheral button decoration board 377, and a central button decoration board 376 for illuminating and decorating the rotation operation section 302, the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b, and the center pressing operation section 303a arranged concentrically are provided. Therefore, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 is made by causing each LED to emit light in the order of the production operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the center button decoration board 376, or in the reverse order. Can produce an effect of light that concentrates on the central pressing operation unit 303a from the center, and an effect of light that diffuses from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting decorations, entertain the player, and direct the player's interest to the central pressing operation unit 303a or to the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to enter the player participation type effect by prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a where the game is performed is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. The door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that can be closed is formed with a door window 101a through which the game area 5a can be viewed from the front, and a glass unit 160 having a transparent flat glass plate 162 is connected to the door window. 101a is attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to be closed, and an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing game balls B for playing games are provided below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The dish unit 200 provided with is attached.

  Then, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. The two upper central dish 312a and lower middle dish 312b are attached to be separated from each other vertically and are continuous with both ends of the upper middle dish 312a and the lower middle dish 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame door Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Therefore, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have three donut-shaped members arranged in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation section 302, the outer peripheral press Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape in which a similar columnar shape (tube) is formed in an annular shape, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the upper central decorative body 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 5a with a cylindrical tube, and to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved and the player's interest is directed to the inside (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Furthermore, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape in which the columnar shape is an annular shape, the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface, an outer side surface, an inner side surface, and the like compared to a flat disk shape. Since it becomes easy to apply fingers, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as the player likes. Further, since the dish center upper decorative body 312 a and the dish center lower decorative body 312 b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312 a and the dish center lower decoration body 312 b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 in an easy posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 can prevent the player from coming too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space for the player to operate the arm and fingers to move around the rotation operation unit 302, and to improve the operability of the rotation operation unit 302. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed. You can entertain the participatory production and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between a retracted position (downward position) and a protruding position (upward position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and increase the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to suppress the decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the player is prompted to perform the effect operation unit 301 that the player wants to operate by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the lowered position and the raised position. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect by accurately operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the player.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other. When the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a protrude upward from the rotation operating unit 302. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be properly used, so that various productions can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the production operation ring decoration board 352, the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the dish center upper decorative body 312a are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is improved in appearance by lighting the lower center decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained by attracting the player's interest strongly. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are appropriately light-emitting. By decorating, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from within the game area 5a to the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or from the production operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. It is possible to cause the player to operate the production operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (the outer periphery button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end with the pressing operation portion 303 moved to the raised position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is not pressed. Although what was not detected was shown, it is not limited to this, You may enable it to detect the press of the outer periphery press operation part 303b. Thereby, even if the same pressing operation is performed, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different effects, or when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted. It is possible to perform a variety of player-participation-type effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, in the state which moved the press operation part 303 (the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b) to the raise position, if the press operation part 303 is pressed, what will move to a fall position will be shown. Although shown, it is not limited to this, and if the pressing operation part 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be regulated after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation unit 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. While arranging, you may make it expose the outer peripheral side surface of a rotation operation part to the exterior in the front surface of a dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above embodiment, the main body frame 4 includes the speaker unit 620a communicated with the curtain plate inner space 40a (port member 47) via the connection cylinder portion 43a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102, 154, and 103 to 120. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. 103 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 is a connection terminal for lending devices such as game balls for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit and the frequency display board. FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 107 is a liquid crystal display control. FIG. 6 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in the unit.

  In the above embodiment, the door frame 3 is not provided with an effect display device related to effect display. However, in the following description, in addition to the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5, the door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) related to effect display can be provided also in the door frame 3. Next, the control configuration will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor and detection signals from various detection switches. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a stop.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  99, a first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. 99, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a big prize opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects an illegal act using a magnet attached to the panel is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, the first special symbol display 1404 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function via the panel relay board 3031 and the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1406, the first special reservation number display 1405, the second special reservation number display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1408. .

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 633, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the detection of the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a long-life proximity switch is also used for the special prize opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, in which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical winning switches 3001 and 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter lifetime than proximity switches.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the substrate 633. When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 633.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 112). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 112). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .) BC0 (see FIG. 108). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of a payout control board 633 (described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 633 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 633 that controls payout of game balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 954 that also performs various functions, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 An error LED display 860b. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the.
The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data as a signal to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means).
In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the various signals based on the information The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like, and is not reset by a payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects a broken ball of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 and a payout detection sensor 591 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in the description.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is stored in the handle relay terminal plate 315, the power supply It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function as serial data, thereby providing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.

  When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby providing a payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is notified, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is empty” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 580, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. The number) 3 ”is displayed, it is informed that it is a“ payout detection sensor error ”(specifically, an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. If it is, the fact that it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 154 is full) When the number “7” is displayed, it is indicated that “CR is not connected” (electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 633 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (award ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls) That the number has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 for proceeding the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 633 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending apparatus connection terminal board. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the sphere rental return display unit such as a game ball or the like. It outputs to the lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 633a and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 633, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 633 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 which is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending return display unit has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and three digits are driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method that sequentially drives each one digit segment indicator among these three digit segment indicators. The segment display is controlled to be lit. With such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display section. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 630 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation is started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power board 630]
Next, the power supply board 630 will be briefly described. The power supply board 630 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 of the hitting ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. Power factor improving circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182, and a palm on the handle 182. And a single button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 633. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 and output it to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information that specifies date and time and time information that specifies hour, minute, and second. The volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is turned through the knob unit. Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 630, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You lose your contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is electrically connected. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered around the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral control various serial I. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output.
This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall clerk etc. of the occurrence of abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and the contents related to the game effects are notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.
Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511ce for storing a copy of the information, and backup non-management for storing information not updated as a backup among various information updated by executing various control programs A target work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired abnormality frequency and abnormality occurrence state between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when a peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 122). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) The information is stored in a bank 0 (SRAM) exclusively for backup purposes. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 Sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data frames Audio data transmission IC 1512c to be transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the hall clerk etc. of the occurrence of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.
Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode (to be described later) by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified to the master volume value when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the synthesized volume of the effect sound is actually set to the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the use Volume adjustment buttons set as sub-volume values to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be played The volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the knob 1510a. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control for playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. To explain, first, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound is actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized to obtain audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmission IC1512c as.

  That is, as for the sound that actually flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification sound is forcibly set to mute until now. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to be rotated (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed). If the adjustment is made by moving to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the adjusted volume is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound) and flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows in order to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the sound volume is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. When it stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 107, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 107, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface.
The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 580, a game ball paid out by the payout device 580 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.

  Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 560 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 630 and the like shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 580, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 630, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to game balls It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when it is received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sand storm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the abnormality that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the abnormal door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection between the two, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal to be described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for informing that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal to be described later is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no abnormality in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “An abnormality has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ") By outputting to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound (for example, “an abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) to the effect of the output to 600. A notification sound flows from a speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and time and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are configured around the RTC 4165a.
The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to be.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer.
In the production line, for example, various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 are performed. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak can The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.
Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 630 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 630]
The power board 630 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 630 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the power supply board 630 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 633b. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and is controlled by launch control. The unit 633b is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 542 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 630 and also to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c smoothes + 37V by removing the supplied + 37V ripple, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 633b uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 542, the constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250, thereby controlling the ball feeding unit 250. The ball feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is supplied as a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied as a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied as a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 633. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 633 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1 Current flows to the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 returns to the payout control board 633, and again from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when +5 V created by the power generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, so that a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the payout control board 633, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral voltage is supplied. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are shown in FIG. 109 (a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 are provided. 4180a, respectively.
The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the like.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 12V to + 3.3V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 107, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from the + 5V.
In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a.
For example, + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is the + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the + 5V power line generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 633. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 109 (b). At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, and then the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 110, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and noise components are removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end thereof is a capacitor MC4 which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1.
The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b includes general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 633 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 633, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives a logic from the payout control board 633. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 633 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. In this case, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation signal that has been pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 633. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the big prize opening sensor 2403, the general prize opening sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401 inputted through the panel relay board 3031 shown in FIG. Since the signal is not directly input to 1310, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 1310a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. 603 is output to the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end connected to the + 12V power supply line and the other end of the resistor MR24. Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 633 and also outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a has a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. As a result, the power failure warning signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. Input to the control board 633.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 through the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is paid out to the payout control board 633. Main system without reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is arranged Through (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 633 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 633, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. And a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the start port solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, or various displays such as the first special symbol display 1404 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. A signal is output to output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to have a reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit 1310ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. Has been configured.
).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 due to a power failure or an instantaneous interruption, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thus, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 110 when a power failure or instantaneous interruption occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 110 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, + 5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or instantaneous power failure occurs, +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb having no function, the peripheral control board 1510 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of a payout control unit, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 118 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 is smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the discharge control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control unit 633a includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 113, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 113, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 154 is input via the power supply board 630, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full detection sensor 154 and the various detection switches such as the ball-cut detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input is described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness).
Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the outer end frame door opening information output signal becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 1310 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during the normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Because it is supposed to be entered Whether the frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened does not occur during normal games. Can be determined.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 630. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is inputted to the payout control board 633. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 633.

  When both of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 633, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF, The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633, so that it is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 included in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 with the noise component removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full sensor 154.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630. When the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 633, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 154 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 633.

  When the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 154 is applied to the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630. When a signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630. In 633, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The detection signal from the various detection switches such as the ball-cut detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 is transmitted through a T-type filter circuit such as a full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591 and the like provided in the payout device 580 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls. The payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. If it is determined based on the detection signal from 154 that the storage space is full of the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. It comes to perform control. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU 952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full. There is a case where the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 584 is driven even though the storage space is full of the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-described prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotator to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 584 is rotated. The payout motor 584 becomes overloaded and abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted to the rotary motion of the payout rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is first removed by the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 110 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a previous-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is a transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 954 and the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 584. 3 is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switch signal input to the voltage switch input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the payout motor 584.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 584. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 584, and rotate the payout motor 584. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 633 receives a ball rental request signal BRDY and a single payout operation start request signal BRQ via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control board 633 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 117, an input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND).
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line in the power supply substrate 630. Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 630 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 630. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 630 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 630. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the photocoupler PIC73 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the RXD terminal that is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 124, and detection signals from the ball-cut detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or a payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and a payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is main-controlled from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the payout control board 633 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, the payout control board 633 has a main winning ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short and medium information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal, which is output every time, from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the main winning ball number information output signal, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 633 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 633.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the total number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of jackpots for 2 rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of jackpots for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling ambition more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the two round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the short time medium information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the award ball number information output signal is displayed every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game balls entered into the game, and the 15 round big hit information output signal generates 15 round big hits. In a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that 2 round jackpots are occurring, and the probability changing information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuations are occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a special symbol change display on the first special symbol display unit 1404 or the second special symbol display unit 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 119, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out as award ball by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is opened.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1404 and the second special symbol display unit 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) in this embodiment. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The display unit 1404 and the second special symbol display unit 1406 can grasp that the special symbol variation display has ended (stopped), and the number of times can be counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal.
As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start opening prize information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the first opening opening 2002 or the second of the pachinko machine 1 every time the start opening prize information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15-round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and then the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that a time reduction state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and time state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color to output a probability changing information output signal.
As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which probability variation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability variation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is a certain number of times, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball, and to determine the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do.
In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 633 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 633. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 633 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 633 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side to the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hall computer and various kinds of output output on the main control board 1310 side also in this point. Wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When a 15-round big hit happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 at a time when the number of remaining game balls becomes small, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as a prize ball is insufficient, so that the game balls are paid out. (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 580, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, as described above, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side reaches 10 balls as game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 as award balls. Since it is a signal to notify that every time, the payout control board 633 can output a prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. The hall clerk, for example, checks the position of the clogged ball by checking the hose-like supply nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 (for example, it occurs in the payout device 580) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and the game ball is paid out by the hall clerk after the 15 round round hit. When the game is returned to the state, the payout control board 633 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 633 is in spite of the time when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 633 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 633. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of this, a main prize ball number information output signal is outputted as a signal to notify that, and the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as ball clogging in the replenishing nozzle, ball clogging or ball smearing in the dispensing device 580) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the relationship with the hall computer can be accurately transmitted. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Stage display drive board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is accommodated in the dish unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, It is restored to three synchronizing signals, that is, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forcible switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. The serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Note that the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, as described above. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the state of waiting for a customer and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display In order to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is intentionally transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side production are each supplied with + 3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as a ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether or not output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later is permitted. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected, and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 124 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the big winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 580) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage dishes. When such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”, the main control board, as shown in FIG. Command balls 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 633. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 121B, a payout control board 633 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 121 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 633 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits); And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, common figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 synchronism effect is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1404 includes commands of special figure 1 synchronization production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a short-time state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, a normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of stops displayed compared to the non-time-short state, and further increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004, a special symbol lottery opportunity can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls (In other words, in comparison with the non-time-short state, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, By lengthening the duration of the opening and closing operation of the movable piece of the pair is a gaming ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102. As shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1406 is composed of commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. In these various commands, “B * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
("*" Indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the opening of the big winning opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 99). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize mouth 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the 1 prize display command for the big prize opening counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (as shown in FIG. 123). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403), and the big hit ending command is Is intended to indicate the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command indicates that the small winning medium big prize winning prize winning effect (the game ball that has entered the big winning prize opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the big prize winning mouth sensor 2403. The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 at the 1st to 16th rounds is released (the start opening unit 2100 The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). The prize winning 1 count display command is used when the prize winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the prize winning opening 1 is changed (when the prize winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball enters the prize winning opening 2005. Is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403), and the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle big winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403), The command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the power-on category includes commands at the time of power-on and the name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. When the power is turned on, the power-on status command indicates that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is used when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power recovers when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure .
), The information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low probability time-short state, high probability time-short state, low probability non-time-short state, and high probability non-time-short state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, what kind of game is copyrighted, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start opening solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information for instructing the driving state of the big prize opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is configured.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 123, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, common symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that can be opened and closed by driving the start-up solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 99. As shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named Opening, Opening of Public Electricity, and Ending per General-purpose Map. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display of the general power is started during the general power release (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2404). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (a pair of movable pieces is driven by the start solenoid 2404) The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the notification display category includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit). When the prize winning opening sensor 2403 is detected), a connection abnormality display command is transmitted on the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, for example. In this case, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection with the big prize opening sensor 2403, etc. is broken or short-circuited. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 123.

  The door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the big prize port sensor. 2403 or the like is transmitted when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command) and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 124, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 105). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated when power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 123, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (a game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second symbol display unit 1400 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and informs the number of balls (the number of balls not yet used) for the variable symbol display (holding number). Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 to display the variation of the special symbol. Instructing the start of a pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1404 based on the special symbol 1 hold, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command indicates that the special symbol 2 hold is the function display unit 1400 Before using the second special symbol display 1406 to display the variation of the special symbol, pre-read and instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1406 based on the special symbol 2 hold To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402, the fact is mainly voiced from the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. Is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of fluctuation reductions (after the outage stop period has elapsed). Sent at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 memory command is sent to the special symbol 1 When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the change display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400, (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display 1404 to display the variation of the special symbol from the number of holds) The special symbol 2 storage command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400. In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used in the variable display, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, the special number indicator 1406 displays a special number from the number of reserves. Design The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is transmitted). In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, or 105 (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402), it is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly for notifying by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 1 uses the start opening prize command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening prize command and does not notify the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the various commands from the payout control board 633 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. The frame state 1, error release navigation, Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is provided with a sphere ball, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error. In the ball ball, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not an abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 has occurred.
The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 125, and FIG. 127 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and the variation to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 shown in FIG. Display pattern random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers used to determine the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the jackpot Random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, the first special symbol indicator when generating the small hit gaming state 404 and a small special symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1406, and an initial value for the small bonus symbol for use in determining an initial value of the random symbol for the small hit symbol A random number for determination is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number for determination per symbol for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed by the normal symbol display unit 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the check sum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal value per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. 99 is generated at every predetermined interval, and even if the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received in 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value. The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power failure clear process, first, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the power failure clear process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, whereby the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that performs rendering control of the effect display device 1600 and the rendering display device 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, game information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for updating by hardware the random number for determining the big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state And setting the acquisition of the random number by latching, and setting the activation of the hard random number circuit 1310an with the main control in the hard random number setting register.
When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program displays the start opening solenoid 2404, the big prize opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display 1404, the second special symbol display 1406, and the first special reservation number display shown in FIG. The drive signals output to the display 1405, the second special reserved number display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1408, etc. are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the Pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, a system for performing rendering control with the effect display device 1600 and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When a standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) is started and a momentary power failure or power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached. Although the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, By setting the interrupt permission in step S52, the main control timer interrupt described later Management is performed, the contents of the main control internal RAM be updated, it may be impossible to complete the main control side power-off time of processing in the main control side power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or power failure. If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication of the clearing of the RAM by the hall clerk. ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (ie, step If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and storage value in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even when the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information based on the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Is composed mainly of the processes of Steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the control-side power-off process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum in step S28 when it restarts. Since it is determined that the result and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in step S64) match, the instantaneously stored and held in the main control built-in RAM The game information immediately before a stop or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. It is determined in step 24 immediately after that whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a power failure warning signal has been input, step S2 As long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed, so that the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12 The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the clear setting value, clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and not being able to start the time measurement again. Yes. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that an interrupt initial setting is performed after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). The system is adopted. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power supply and the part that is covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122 are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start opening solenoid 2404, information for instructing the driving state of the big prize opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. Has been. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information for instructing the driving state of the start opening solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the big prize opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. A problem in the case where there is no command, that is, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the sensor 2405 is driven and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 is opened by the opening / closing member, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the big prize opening sensor 2405 Is started and the special winning opening 2005 is shifted from the closed state by the opening / closing member to the opened state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the In other words, for example, a winning ball 1 count display that indicates the number of gaming balls that have been entered into the big winning hole 2005 and detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command, the peripheral control board 1510 has the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the main winning board 2005 is stopped by the opening / closing member 2107 by stopping the driving of the big winning hole sensor 2405. From the main control board 1310, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing to shift from the opened state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the big prize opening sensor 2405 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is moved by the opening / closing member 2107. A transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the fifth round of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the fifth round of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time-short state and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to expand it. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 is set to the power recovery time set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the information, it is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the start-up solenoid 2404 starts to be driven and the pair of movable pieces rises substantially vertically from the left and right. So that the transition to a state of being expanded to.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that it was not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main prize winning hole sensor 2405 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big prize winning hole 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the current state, so that the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is four rounds of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is) Display screen) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and the big winning prize sensor 2 A screen indicating that the winning prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member 2107 after starting the driving of 05 (for example, “It is a big hit. The big winning opening is opened. “Please play the game to enter the game.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive a big prize after the power is restored. It is possible to instruct a game to enter a game ball in 2005, and for example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is advantageous to the player. In this state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then power is restored, the start solenoid 2404 starts to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310 and a pair of possible A screen that informs you that the piece has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower starting port.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of making a ball can be instructed. Thereby, when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in the state. For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection apparatus in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. 124 when power is turned on (including when power is turned on, and when power is restored by power failure or instantaneous power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specifications (so-called ST machine, etc.)) in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times).

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur). As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 122 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interruption process is repeated at every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 127 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display unit 1404 and the second special symbol display unit 1406 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed.
Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 shown in FIG. 102 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. 102, the detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting the game ball entered into the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 102, and the game ball entered into the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. 99 are detected. A detection signal from the first starter sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102, a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starter 2004 shown in FIG. 99, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99, and a magnet that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 has normally received a detection signal from the detection sensor 4024 and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Each is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection from the second start port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 102 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and a big winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and are respectively read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the big prize opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 121 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to inform the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 633. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 633, the payout control program performs various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 122 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display in FIG. 102). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is inputted when the game state is not a big hit gaming state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc. In this case, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 102, and the random number extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  If these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 2402. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1404 or the second special symbol display unit 1406 is set so that the indicator 1404 or the second special symbol display unit 1406 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 99 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the big prize opening sensor 2405 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (rounds) when the big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times 2 to turn on the two-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and transmitted as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and output information described above. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol taken out matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, and the transmission described above as the transmission information And the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. To remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to the big prize opening sensor 2405 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the big prize opening 2005 when it is in the big hit game state, or it is driven to the start opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the movable piece In addition to outputting signals, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information about the game (game information such as signals, short and middle information output information, start opening prize information output signal) And it outputs the signal to the payout control board 633.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process which is this routine and shown in FIG. Based on detection signals from the big prize opening sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102) when a game ball that has entered the various winning commands 2005 (see FIG. 99) is detected. 1 command display command corresponding to the winning prize count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing production related, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role production, Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, etc.) classified into notification display shown in FIG. Min is the various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as + 5V when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. 112, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a at least shifts the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41 aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310 aea as main serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122 are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Constituting a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring a main control return destination command at power-on, status, The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM reads out the game information from the game backup information in accordance with the game information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 633 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 633 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 633 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. 122, the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122 for instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the big prize port sensor 2405, which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is peripherally controlled. It can output to the substrate 1510. That is, the main control board 1310 performs main setting in the work area setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command and the main power-on time are shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, There are constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Check the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and thumb value. Send apparatus, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 144. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the continuation of processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 128. FIG. 127 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a rotation detection sensor history creation process, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ball spot determination process, and FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prize ball stock number addition process. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing for adding the number of prize balls for renting a ball, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout ball cornering operation determination setting process, FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout setting process, and FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. 143 is an error release operation determination. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of processing, and FIG. 144 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) and input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit during a payout operation by ball lending.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock count addition processing for balls, prize ball stock count addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball engagement operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball engagement operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency A counter reset determination process and an error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for winning balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball movement determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball edge determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize ball Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball engagement operation judgment setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[15-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 turns on the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 128 to 127 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 952a (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 952a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. If the operation switch 954 is determined to be instructed to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Pinning control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 952a (hereinafter referred to as “ROM with built-in payout control”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes a payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of an operation signal of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is sent to the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. From the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when not elapsed. Is set.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms have elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or a payout motor The number of balls for which a drive signal is output to 584 or the game motor 584 has actually paid out a game ball is awarded ball information. (In this embodiment, every time the payout motor 584 pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 558.) Is provided with a prize ball number information signal output judgment counter for outputting prize ball number information. This prize ball number information signal output judgment counter is used for the game ball actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The number of balls is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is calculated. A game ball that is actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring. A process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the award is performed by the port input process in step S550 described later, with the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added and stored and updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in 124. In step S548, the prize ball is stored from this prize ball information storage area. When the value of the counter for determining the number information signal output is read and the value of the counter for determining the number of winning ball information signals output exceeds the value 10, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558, and The surpassed number of balls is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information signal output determination counter. ing. Or a display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection Each of the signals, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, and stores them as input information in the input information storage area To do.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when the determination is made as to whether or not a ball stagnation state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the sphere detection set as the determination condition is performed. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotor is not performed, ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 Time, full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as a ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are inconsistent. Inconsistency counter reset determination that is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistently paid out are repeatedly performed Perform time management of time. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of subtraction becomes 0. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured.
These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 952 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, and thus the payout control MPU 952 a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. It is possible to continue from time to time, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of various signal exchanges between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. The data is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 952a to the CR unit 6. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball collision operation determination setting process As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball cannot be performed can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is when the power is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while when the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the lending device connection terminal board 86 such as a game ball. Is not electrically connected via the terminal, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. Output from the output terminal to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space of the above-described foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the input information based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the game balls are full or the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-described payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with a game ball is full is determined by using a timer interruption period of 2 ms and detecting a full tank in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full tank and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is When transitioned from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the game balls stored is state information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full information that informs the fact that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full is stored in the state information storage area. To do.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, When the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full-ball and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 When is shifted from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball-out information that informs that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the ball break is transmitted to the effect that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not greater than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 633 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball piece information, the corresponding display data ( In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 122 based on the various information. Main control board 1310 by creating a command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame state 2 command) Send to. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not greater than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information. To the main control board 1310. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to a game ball payout operation, for example, information relating to the location of the error that has occurred with respect to this payout operation (hereinafter referred to as “the game ball payout operation”). A frame status 1 command (first error cancellation command) including “error occurrence position information”) is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 has been detected, the error described above. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). The payout control program transmits a body frame release command (first body frame release command) when a body frame release detection signal is input from the body frame release switch 619 (body frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). A walker, this payout control program, when a body frame closing detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is inputted, transmits a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) (body frame command sending means) , First body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means; 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the state information storage area described above in the command transmission process (step S566) described above, and the machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko machines, and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Upon receiving this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the radio device possessed by the hall clerk, and this hall clerk provides the pachinko machine with the machine number based on this machine number information. It is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 In step S550, port input processing is performed. In step S552, Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the processing of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a power-on process of the payout control unit by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[15-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 128 to 129.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 131 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Then, the register is switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation process]
Next, rotation detection sensor history creation processing will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

  When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 detects the rotation from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 132 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from this rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process (step S614). In the rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). . In this rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation detection sensor history creation process is performed, the detection slit rotates after the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 580 is completed. Thereby, the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 can be reliably started in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 executes a payout control program as shown in FIG. 133 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation detection sensor history information in the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 described above, continuously in four timer interruption cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 584, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation detection sensor 840 outputs the rotation. The detection signal history, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 132, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, This is based on the detection signal from the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 584 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 584. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 952a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 584.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determination state”); And three states (the “fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state in (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 584, the fixed position fixed state in (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination skip state in (3). This corresponds to the 13-step rotation of the payout motor 584, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 step rotations.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is the time for which the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes a value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . Note that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580, and guided to the payout device 580. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the payout device 580 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. In addition, since the period and period required for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state caused by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted has occurred.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 detects rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1.
In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-spinning state has occurred. To do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 584 performs a ball-bending operation, the value is 1, When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When this ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the ball stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball prize ball number addition process is performed from the main control board 1310. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The prize ball stock number adding process for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the payout device 580, a setting is made so that the number of winning ball stock for lending is added.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for the award ball is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 receives a payball command as shown in FIG. 135 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program receives the prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. Yes. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the lending prize ball stock number addition process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the payout control program as shown in FIG. 136 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the prize ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The winning ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is processing to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 has a payout control program in which the payout control program controls the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the housing space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and to a value of 0 when it does not reach the alert threshold value TH or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  If the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and is looking into the effect unfolded by the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 105, the player inadvertently pays as a prize ball for one round. The game balls that have been taken out may not be removed from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the award ball stock PBS increases to exceed the warning threshold value TH, and is provided in the door frame 3 as a warning effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 322, and the player fills the lower plate 322 (the storage space for the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[15-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. In this paying-ball ball movement determination setting process, the payout motor 584 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, or performs the ball-balling operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. Or is set to one of them.

  When the payout ball sliding motion determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 has a payout control program built in the payout control described above as shown in FIG. 138 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit.
The upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, the payout control program determines that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted has occurred. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the sphere motion is not being performed.

  If the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, if a ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 584.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process of step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read from this state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space for the foul cover unit 270 is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process (to be described later) (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 is performed.

On the other hand, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls. If a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 580 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And stored in the CR communication information storage area.
As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process in FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[15-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 584 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). In this determination, it is determined based on the drive command number DRV whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stopping) the drive signal to the payout motor 584. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The count will be described in detail later, but the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), a value 0 is set to the real ball count PB (Step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increment, step S730), and this routine is ended. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. Thus, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the actual ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Judge that Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 that is one ball that is to be paid out can be rounded up in the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation for paying out the one ball that should be paid out can be performed again. . By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[15-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, the setting is made to cancel the ball-spinning state caused by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 causes the payout control program to execute the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 140 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed.

  When the ball collision determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program An output of a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 584 performs a ball-bending operation, the value is 1, When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process in FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 detects the rotation of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 141 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. The number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body is normally equal to the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139, and by this retry operation, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body and the actual payout detection are detected. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected by the sensor 591 are repeatedly paid. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG.
Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). ).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not match due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is obtained. As a result, the value 5 is set.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when power is restored. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. Thereby, in determination of step S780, monitoring of the paying-out operation | movement (retry operation | movement) of the game ball by the payout device 580 which was performed until the momentary power failure or the power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery. Yes. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device It is determined that the game ball payout operation by 580 is in a normal state, and it is possible to determine that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify that “there is error information”, retry error information for displaying the number “5” is set on the error LED display 860b which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 633, and the payout control built-in RAM described above is set. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED indicator 860b and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor occurs. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 as a RAM clear signal. The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, and displays the RAM clear notification command in the peripheral control board shown in FIG. To 1510. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 998.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or information in the prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in FIG. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process is stored. Based on the error LED indicator 860b, To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 emits a door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 633. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk confirms the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, the disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. The work can be performed very quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect a game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a replay operation and illegally acquiring a game ball to be paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Then, since a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk or the like of the hall rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591 can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the operation switch 954 is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[15-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 Is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 142 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the number of game balls discharged and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. A counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of game balls normally received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591, Since they match, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The inconsistency counter INCC is used to determine whether or not the game balls that are inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the game board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 5 (replacement of a new stand). Since the specification can be changed, the payout control board 633 that controls the payout apparatus 580, the drive power supply of the payout apparatus 580, and the power supply board 630 that generates the control power supply of the payout control board 633 are framed as common functions. Equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 952a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 127 stores an inconsistency counter INCC immediately before power-off when the power is shut off. In the process at step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process shown in 129 (setting of the RAM work area upon power recovery), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 5 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and replaced with another game board 5 ′ having a different game specification from the game board 5, the payout control board is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in 633 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 5 ′ is attached, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 5 before replacement is attached is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 ′ installed, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the inconsistency counter INCC is set. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above, it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 952a in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′. There is a fear. That is, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′, an abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact of various connectors There is a risk that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation even though no defect or the like has occurred.

  In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 5 ′ is likely to break down despite being new. May be given to players. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability of one game ball being paid out due to the retry operation, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141, the process of step S778 has a probability of 1 / million from the mismatch counter INCC. The value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the operation of step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591. The abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, the disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and the poor contact of various connectors. The segment display mounted on the payout control board 633 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Retry to display the number “5” on the error LED indicator 860b Set the over information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. This causes an error in the retry operation even though there is no abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact failure of various connectors, or the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating that there is from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  It should be noted that, by intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that the hall clerk or the like is in the state of the pachinko machine 1 I will rush to confirm. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, as described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 591 is Even if intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[15-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is being operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 causes the payout control program to cancel the error of the operation switch 954 as shown in FIG. 143 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it has been operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the error cancellation is instructed and the operation switch 954 is operated. It is determined that

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the payout device 580 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control program is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A status command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for reporting that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times.) Repeatedly flowing from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The clerk of the hall, etc. who heard this retry operation error notification announcement, the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. A defect or the like can be confirmed very quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is in a state where the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 633, can be forcibly stopped or lent out. In this case, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state in which the PRDY signal is raised is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process in FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, the internal factor In response to the occurrence of the error, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, this causes an external factor. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on. That is, the operation switch 954 clears the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main process on the main control side is executed from the time of turning on the operation switch 954 (operation switch) that was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error that has occurred regarding the payout operation. Instead of this, an operation unit for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout memory unit) It is functioning as. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not familiar with the operation of the pachinko machine, as long as the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the gaming machine is remembered, it can be If a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation is exhibited, while the predetermined time from the time the power is turned on according to the timing when the operation switch 954 is operated. If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can take appropriate action without hesitating the switch operation by improving the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be resumed before the played player loses his willingness to play.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. If the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 328, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and this ball lending operation signal is represented as TDS shown in FIG. The data is input from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is inputted pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls, so as shown in FIG. 144 (a) The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the payout control MPU 952a to which this BRDY signal is inputted has a payout control program from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. A predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as a monetary amount) is monitored whether or not a BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the money rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as an amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as shown in FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 952a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledge ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 952a holds the logical state of the EXS signal as HI, that is, keeps the raised state, in order to notify that one payout operation has started. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H3.
) Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held until the elapse of) (Timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Then, only a predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as shown in FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 952a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 144 (c). The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the CR unit 6 rises from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY held up and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  Note that the payout control MPU 952a is in a case where a ball breakage, a ball curl, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, or the like is occurring, and is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY from the CR unit 6). When the logic is LOW, that is, when it is held down, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the PRDY signal that has been raised from timing H1 and held is set to LOW, that is, the state is lowered, as shown in FIG. And output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU952a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU 952a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount, and the amount is 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with the number of lent out balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322.
A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 and, for example, the amount of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of rented balls 321 When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary amount When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls for 1000 yen as an amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 allows the CR unit 6 to send a BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA has passed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. It is output to the dispensing control board 633 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a ball, and when the signal is not started up, Even when the lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 633 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is not lowered. In this case, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and 144 (f), when the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) After the elapse of time, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. Then, PRDY is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a And output to the CR unit 6 as a game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. That (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB from the timing J1 (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, set to 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2 as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J3 after the elapse of a predetermined period JD from the timing J3 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, set to 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as the logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF from the timing J5 (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 147 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, and FIG. 150 is a flowchart of the LOCKN signal history creation process. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection abnormality determination process, FIG. 152 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process, and FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC. Explain the timing to output the connection confirmation signal It is a timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, LOCKN signal The history creation process, connection abnormality determination process, and connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit described later is turned on. This process is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the process peripheral control unit steady process, and the connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information that is the content that is backed up to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) 1ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination processing, the production backup information which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and the Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and comparison of effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511 dc. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Subsequent to such hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 5, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, a luminance setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the effect display is performed so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the apparatus 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information is currently set with luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is included.

  In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LED is included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the brightness of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the effect display device 1600 is not performed. It has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Yes.

Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1.
By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. 106, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the above.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the effect display device 1600. As a result, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, outputting the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is canceled. It has become. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. A plurality of LEDs and effects by a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and various effects from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of combined music and sound effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, in addition to the music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is sent from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information sent from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The production control program is based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A winning prize 1 count display command (a winning prize count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating the content of full as shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 122 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized in relation to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display shown in FIG. 102, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, an effect display navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal effect manner associated with the effect operation, for example, an effect display device Visually warn outside using 1600 (rendering device), (rendering device), and lamp (rendering device), or warn auditorily externally using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 in spite of being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, various equipment provided on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is used as the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the effect display device 1600. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6.
Audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data by the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0-6. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in the program from the mute level to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is reduced. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be made more powerful, and that it will shift to a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to music and sound effects. You can also do it.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc shown in FIG. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the MA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the Bank0 from the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy to the bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied sequentially from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511a Is stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM), specifying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifying the copy to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db The contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in backup second area 1511 dc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is designated, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously written by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling in the middle, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1009 in the time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In addition to the signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. By notifying the completion to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. In other words, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. . In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c attached externally shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the frame I / O port motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c to be externally attached. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. A Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for flops substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c is externally configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 15 shown in 127 Set to 1c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 1511Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus received is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , The movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In the effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby detecting history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. The control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output in order to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing state is acquired by acquiring the frequency of abnormality and the state of occurrence of abnormality between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank of the backup first area 1511 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in (1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the MA controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the top address of) in the backup second area 1511 cc, Bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted. In some cases, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 starts the transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and this causes the main peripheral serial data to be built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 127 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral ring reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power-saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Then, the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are all copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU The contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac by the core 1511aa are transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is connected to the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). The data) No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined.

If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504).
In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST includes the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection error judgment processing]
Next, the connection abnormality determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described.
In this connection abnormality determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is an abnormality in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection abnormality determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 105, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 In this state, there is an abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the display and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Counting the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. The communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a value of 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that a connection between the transmitter and the receiver is reached when the accumulated number of times determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. This flag indicates whether or not an abnormality has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely abnormal. An error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, with the value 0 being set, but is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 151, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 105 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 145 in the peripheral control unit steady process as illustrated in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, it is a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a period during which the effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in the waiting state. Can be determined on the basis of the screen generation schedule data, and a period during which the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or a waiting state for the customer is entered. When the demonstration display by the effect display device 1600 is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or in the customer waiting state. It is not a period during which the demonstration display device 1600 is demonstrating The (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is finished as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and the updating of all the pointers is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step) S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 132 is executed. Counts up the number of times that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. To do (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when there is no number of times that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times that it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is one time. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value between the transmitter and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection has not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when an abnormality has surely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished.
In this communication error display process, in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, drawing is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Process. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a message “An error has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or during the period when the effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration in the customer waiting state An abnormality occurs in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal output request data as a response signal to the LOCKN terminal. LOCKN signal from peripheral control When the signal is output to the PU 1511a and this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred even if an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a notification image (for example, , “An error has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk.”) Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and a notification sound (for example, “upper plate side liquid crystal display device ")" Is repeatedly performed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, you may make it perform the process which lightes all the various LED mounted on the various decoration board | substrates with which the LED for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are equipped.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. Peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Or the like, the decorative symbol change display is executed, and the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main control side timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 127, or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls to the game is “big hit”, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds, up to 15 rounds. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative symbol is displayed on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the central decorative symbol is displayed on the center, and the right side. The display of the variation on the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display on the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed to the player. At this time, the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol table of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed in vessel 1406 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed variably, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this manner, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, thereby producing the effect display device shown in FIG. 8 as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area 1600 (timing K0), the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the schedule data storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in e, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the change display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 152 in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Even when it is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The process to recover the connection is not performed, and the steps in the connection recovery process For example, the message “An anomaly has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display processing of 1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. An image is displayed based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

When the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the presentation is completed along with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In other words, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated in the scheduler update process and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process 152. In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 executed as one process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process. When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, while when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver is even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. That is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver is abnormal. When the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends, while the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG Is not 0 (value 1), that is, if there is a certain abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display process described above is performed. The routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 It is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is necessarily performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the transmitter The process of reestablishing the connection between the receiver and the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the two has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the abnormality between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred) For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an error has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.
Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter as described above. The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated, and the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 In other words, the connection between the transmitter and receiver is abnormal once. In some cases, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed when the cumulative number of times determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. As a result, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered, but the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the occurrence has occurred has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication By always performing the error display process, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Ordinary has occurred. Please call your clerk. "Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative design and the central decorative design are activated. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in connection recovery processing is not performed even if The process of restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. An error has occurred in the side LCD device. Please call the store clerk "message is not displayed, so that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. While invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

  In this manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are changed again. In the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. The drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. LO from the door frame-side receiver ICSDIC0 telling that the data is abnormal data KN signal is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, and the player is given a profit. Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit gaming state occurs, when the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol Until the design, the center decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed, even if the effect image drawn in the display area is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc. Rather than interrupting and recovering the drawing state correctly, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By indicated, we are most interested with information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is in a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. In the period during which the display device 1600 is demonstrating, the LOCKN signal output request data is greatly different from the case where it is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is obtained during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 or during a period when the effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration in the customer waiting state. Transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the transmitter This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request in order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection with the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, differential Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the merging circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “An error has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In addition, a notification sound to that effect (for example, “There is an abnormality in the upper-side liquid crystal display device. It has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thus, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred even if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not occurred. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal is not input Transmission Abnormally and that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the motor and the receiver can be determined to have occurred. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that an abnormality has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 131 as a notification process. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds an abnormality, it can notify the hall clerk or the like by executing a notification process, so that the hall clerk or the like It is extremely easy to check whether or not an abnormality has occurred before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. Therefore, it is possible to detect the abnormality without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The receiver ICSDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication error occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. For this purpose, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication abnormality between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the abnormality due to the communication abnormality between the image communications at an early stage, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating the abnormality.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives and outputs an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 that is a production control microprocessor is a LOCKN signal that is a communication abnormality occurrence signal that indicates that a communication abnormality has occurred between image communications between the side production receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame production transmitter IC 1512d. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so as to indicate that a communication abnormality has occurred because it can be output to the control MPU 1511a. Is the “top plate side LCD display Location error has occurred. Please call your clerk. "That generates a message, so that it is possible to inform by displaying the generated image on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communications at an early stage, notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and notifies the player of the hall, etc. Can be directly informed to the store clerk who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the store clerk in the hall can resolve the abnormality at an early stage. Can start work to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game by discovering and eliminating the abnormality at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is an abnormality in the connection between the receiver for the side effect ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication abnormality between image communications Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door frame side The connection confirmation signal that tells the outgoing receiver ICSDIC0 that transmission is to be started can be repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Yes. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. Since the connection confirmation signal can be continuously output only during the period in which the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication abnormality can be solved.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where there is an abnormality in the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication abnormality between the image communications is displayed. Door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d from door frame side performance When the connection confirmation signal that tells the receiver receiver ICSDIC0 to start transmission is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, When the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation signal When the output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect. The transmission to the receiver IC ICDIC0 is stopped and the liquid crystal display control unit 15 The image 2 of the sound source built VDP1512a generated and is capable of outputting to the door frame side effect for receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is an abnormality elimination signal, only during the period when starting and stopping and displaying the progress of the game, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication abnormality is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing and displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 131 Even if the main control MPU 1310a of the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game and starts executing the game again, the display screen of When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts execution of the game again and ends (every time period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period)) Can be directed to cancel.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball launched by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 580 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 124 payout control MPU 952a is installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG.
If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 110 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation is performed within the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 115, a RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and power on 125 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. If the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process in step S16 is performed (or the period in which the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 128 is performed from when the power is turned on) has passed, the payout device 580 is related. An error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the main control MPU 1310a as the game control microprocessor to the payout control MPU 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a as an error canceling signal for canceling the generated error. It is something to combine.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 125 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 110 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is performed from when the power is turned on. 115 is output to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and main control side power When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 in the time process is performed (or the period in which the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 128 is performed from when the power is turned on) has passed, An error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a as the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a as the game control microprocessor as an error clearing signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the device 580. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, by an operation with one operation switch 954. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 3031 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a gate sensor 2401, a second start opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first starting opening. The sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 (to be described later, a magnetic detection sensor 4024) are connected. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a gaming machine, try to obtain an unfair advantage by manipulating the flow-down state of the game ball as desired by bringing a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) closer to the game ball that is driven into the game area. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by sound. Yes.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. Do not (0V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thereby, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thereby, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage, in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 3031 through the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the previous stage transistor ITR1 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied. In addition, the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. In this way, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay board 3031.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. Note that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 3031, the transistor ITR 0 is turned on, the transistor ITR 1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR 1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, if the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work etc., the pin contact The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust or the like easily enters from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a right-handed game, when sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, to the connector member However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in the case where such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 155, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the connector contact is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which no magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Will be lifted. In FIG. 155, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031, there is a possibility that a sensor signal is erroneously detected when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b 1310 has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  The magnetic detection sensors 4024 are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second detection state). State), a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side. An avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is configured by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR built in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 before the connection part. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conductive state. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511 and a process of outputting a signal indicating that from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality with the effect display device 1600, a warning lamp, voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state (second state) in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby incorporating the built-in transistor STR. The transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener This is applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  As in the prior art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device, a warning indicator, a voice, etc. are informed that an illegal gaming act using the computer has been performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken. . Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 includes a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, a second resistor having one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. And the resistor IR3. When the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment is compared with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 155, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 is an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 is configured by a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit configured by the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoiding unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoiding unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 157, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage. 1 is applied to one end of the resistor. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3.
That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is almost grounded. As a result, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the third embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 and a resistor that constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage that is higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage that is lower than the first voltage. IR1, IR4, and IR5 are included. Compared to the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 having the other end grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 is configured by a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the former stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 Current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. In addition, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 158, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased.

  That is, a voltage in which a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Do not flow. Therefore, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Also, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each provided voltage output unit 4163 is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial product, TOSHIBA Corporation). It can be used by connecting to the product.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the first to third embodiments. However, if the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166 is not changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The locations of the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 on the substrate can be variously changed and arranged as necessary. Below, several variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[Example 4]
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031. Note that the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the connector CON2 is connected to the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay board 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. Are electrically connected.

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoiding unit 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031. The signal relay transistor ITR0 is arranged at the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Yes. Also in the fifth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the connector CON2 electrically connects the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay board 3031 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control board 1310. It is connected.

  In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses having connector members at both ends (in FIG. 157, simply indicated as CON2. ) Is electrically connected. For this reason, contact resistance may also occur at the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection of a signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the bull-up resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end of the connector member CON2 on the circuit, that is, one end. Another avoidance portion may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, similarly to the avoidance portion 4166. According to this, signal false detection can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is enhanced.

  In the present invention, the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by using the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end in the fourth and fifth embodiments. This essentially selects the one that is advantageous in terms of control due to the difference in logic (whether HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected in the subsequent stage. For this purpose, a circuit comprising a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, and this is arranged in front of the main control input circuit 1310a.

  However, the other end of the bullup resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line, and the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, the emitter terminal is grounded, and A main control input circuit 1310a itself having a collector terminal connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, a main circuit Since the control input circuit 1310a can perform detection), however, the present invention is sufficiently established.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4166 and a detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. It should be noted that the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, with the arrangement location being moved to the main control board 1310. Also in the sixth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 163, a signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 is connected, and an avoidance unit 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

  When the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are configured as in the fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay board 3031 is a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. There is an advantage that it is possible to make it common regardless of the type).

From the standpoint of ease of assembly, it is desirable to use a relay board, but the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 provided at the start port that brings a lottery to the player are more convenient. Even if it is missing, it may be better to connect the main control board 1310 directly with a connector without providing circuit elements on the relay board in order to prevent fraud.
In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment functions suitably.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example as well, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided at the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, with the location being moved to the main control board 1310. Also in the seventh embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay board 3031 is only formed with a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays a signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024.
The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 3031. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 3031 in the previous stage of the connection part. This is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

  In FIG. 164, the relay board provided with only the connectors (CON3, CON4) is used, but the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

  Even in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], since the avoidance section 4166 is provided, the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), the connector member. When the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance.

  In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 through a connector CON3 (shown by a square in the drawing) provided on the panel relay board 3031. Further, the panel relay board 3031 is provided. It is configured to be electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (shown by a square in the drawing) provided on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the contact resistance may occur at three locations, the connector CON3, the connector CON4, and the connector CON1.

  In consideration of this, the voltage generated by the current flowing through the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 portion and the contact resistance generated by loosening of the connection portion of the panel relay board 3031 (CON3 and CON4 shown by squares in the figure). Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state (additional voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connection portions described above), the avoidance unit Reference numeral 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, and therefore, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of each connector member, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. Can do.

  In the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance unit 4166. However, the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0, but has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 157 (Example 2) or the avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 158 (Example 3) can be used.

  Since the panel relay board 3031 shown in the seventh embodiment is formed only with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relay signals from the detection sensor units, signals from a plurality of detection sensor units are received. There is an advantage that the printed wiring is formed so as to be integrated independently on the panel relay board 3031 and combined into one connector member, and the main control board 1310 is connected to the connector.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, electrical connection between the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of electrical connection mainly between the detection sensor section, the panel relay board, and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a collective term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the second A start opening sensor 2402, a special prize opening sensor 2403, a vibration detection sensor, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102), and the like correspond to this.

  The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which the main control MPU 1310 which is a control subject is mounted. Panel relay board 3031 is a board that relays the detection signal of detection sensor unit 4000 to main control board 1310.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. By being connected by a connector, it is electrically connected. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 provided in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided in the main control board. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Arrangement position of panel relay board 3031 and main control board 1310 in the gaming machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically showing each example of arrangement positions of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. In FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. 166 (D), the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are the rear part of the game board 5 at positions that are not visually recognized by the player. , A liquid crystal display device) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown in the figure). Reference numeral 180 denotes a handle unit that is provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and is operated by the player, and reference numeral 303 denotes a lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. And a push operation unit that is pushed by the player for production.

  In FIG. 166 (A), the main control board 1310 is arranged at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5 is a panel relay board 3031 on the right side of the main control board 1310 in front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. In FIGS. 166 (A) to 165 (D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-like transparent gaming panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) that defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000.

  In FIG. 166 (B), a panel relay board 3031 is arranged at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located at the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the right of the panel relay board 3031 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. In FIG. 166 (C), the main control board 1310 is disposed at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5 is a panel relay board 3031 on the left side of the main control board 1310 in front view. The arrangement pattern is shown.

  In FIGS. 166A to 166C, the positional relationship of the panel relay board 3031 in the front-rear direction with respect to the main control board 1310 is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or the panel relay board in front of the main control board 1310. 3031 is located.

  FIG. 166 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged in the front-rear direction at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5. In FIG. 166 (D), a panel relay board 3031 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is determined based on various conditions.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. By being connected by a connector, it is electrically connected. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 provided in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided in the main control board. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, the purpose of which is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of the arrangement positional relationship between a vibration generation source and a control board.

[Example of arrangement of avoidance unit]
FIG. 167 (A) to FIG. 167 (C) are diagrams showing examples of arrangement of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. FIG. Note that the avoidance unit 4510 has a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance portion 4166 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, and in the circuit portion arranged in front of the avoidance portion 4166, the connection state of the connector member is loosened, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added by the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged at a stage after the avoiding unit 4166 is avoided.

  As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the risk of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 increases due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) described above, the layout of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is usually determined on the game board 5 from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generating source that affects, in addition to the one caused by the collision between the game ball guiding path member arranged in the right area of the game area 5a by the right stroke and the game ball described above, for example, an effect button (operation button) The hitting operation of the ball launcher, the hitting operation of the hitting ball of the ball launcher, the sound from the high output speaker, and the like.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance due to contact resistance generated by looseness of the connector member. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4545 is appropriately disposed on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration generation source.

  FIG. 167A shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 3031. When a vibration is applied to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 3031, FIG. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and contact resistance is generated by this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action by the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. It is.

  FIG. 167B shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. When the contact member 4502 or 4503 is loosened due to the addition, and contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, so that it is relayed from the panel relay board 3031. This is to avoid erroneous detection of the output signal.

  FIG. 167 (C) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on both the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 3031. Vibration is applied to the member 4501, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, thereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector. Even if the member 4503 is loosened and contact resistance is generated by this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. In addition, the signal relayed from the panel relay board 3031 and output. It is to avoid erroneous detection of.

[Specific example of vibration source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
FIG. 168 (A) to FIG. 168 (F) are diagrams showing a specific example of a vibration generation source in the pachinko machine 1, and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. In each figure, a member that is a vibration generation source is indicated by a hatched portion. FIG. 168 (A) to FIG. 168 (C) show a game in which a number of right-handed game balls continuously flow down to the right area of the game area 5a when playing right-handed. An example is shown in which a ball guide path unit 4200 is provided, and when slight sliding wear occurs due to vibration from the game ball guide path unit 4200 applied to the connector member, this may cause contact resistance. Yes.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (A), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, a panel is provided with respect to the game ball guiding path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source. Since the relay board 3031 is disposed in the vicinity, the connector member [connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167A] of the panel relay board 3031 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (B), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, the game ball guide path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source is Since the control board 1310 is arranged close to the connector board, the connector member [connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167B] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, the game ball guide path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source is Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector members [connector member 4501, connector member 4502, and connector member 4503 shown in FIG. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (C)].

  FIG. 168 (D) shows a case where the vibration source is the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the player concentrates on the game, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 to perform a striking operation, or during the specific performance, a message “continuous hit” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player recognizes the message. Thus, when the player strikes the pressing operation unit 303 continuously and the vibration generation source is due to an operation on the pressing operation unit 303 for production, the pressing operation unit 303 becomes the vibration generation source. A case is assumed. In such a case, in FIG. 168 (D), the main control board 1310 is disposed close to the pressing operation portion 303 serving as a vibration generation source, so that the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503] shown in (B) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D), not only in the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (D), FIG. 167 (A) to FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

  FIG. 168 (E) shows a case where the vibration generation source is a hitting ball 543 of the ball launcher 540 (refer to FIG. 10 for a specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the batting force (elastic force) of the ball launching device 540 with respect to the game ball fired by the hitting ball 543 increases, and the impact at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In such a case, in FIG. 168 (E), the panel relay board 3031 is disposed close to the ball striking ball 543 serving as the vibration generation source, so that the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  168 (E) is not limited to the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (E), and even in the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D), FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 167 (C) can be employed.

  FIG. 168 (F) shows a case where the vibration generation source is a body frame speaker 622 for sound output (see FIG. 79 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a loud sound effect is output from the main frame speaker 622 to excite the gaming state during a specific effect, and it is assumed that the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In such a case, in FIG. 168 (F), the panel relay board 3031 is disposed close to the main body frame speaker 622 serving as a vibration generation source, so that the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in (A) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  Not only in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (F), but also in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (A), 168 (B) and 168 (D). 167 (A) to 167 (C), the arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS.

  In the pachinko machine 1, the number of members that serve as the vibration generation source described above is not limited to one. For example, a member that is a source of vibration generation according to the game state, such as one provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a hitting ball 543, one provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a pressing operation unit 303, etc. Are also expected to change. That is, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of members serving as vibration generation sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be adopted.

  As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration generation source. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member that is a vibration generation source, and contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit based on the contact resistance is generated. 4000 and erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board 3031 can be avoided.

  As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a right-handed game, when vibration is applied to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, this causes contact resistance. There is a fear.

  If a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to this, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance will rise, and an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit unit. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance.
As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor increases. However, normally, the arrangement of the panel relay board and the main control board on the game board is determined from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, in addition to those caused by the collision between the right-handed game board and the game ball as described above, for example, those caused by the hitting operation of the effect button, the ball hitting operation of the ball launcher, For example, a high volume by an output speaker may be mentioned.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, the purpose of which is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration generation source.

  The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1]
A detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In order to solve the above problems,
In the right area of the game area into which the game ball is to be shot, a game ball guiding path unit is arranged in which the game ball that has been continuously hit to the right as the game ball is hit to the right.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the game ball guiding path unit, and either one of the main control board and the panel relay board is caused by contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding voltage addition action is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitable for either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guiding path unit serving as the vibration generation source. Can be arranged. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 2] relays a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In a gaming machine equipped with a panel relay board,
It has an operation button that allows a player to perform a predetermined operation for production,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the operation button, and voltage is added to one of the main control board and the panel relay board by contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding the action is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button serving as the vibration generation source. be able to. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In the machine
A ball launcher that launches a game ball into the game area in response to an operation to the hitting handle, wherein at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member;
The board having the connector member is disposed in the vicinity of the ball striking ball of the ball launcher, and the contact resistance generated in the connector member on either the main control board or the panel relay board An avoidance unit for avoiding the voltage addition action by is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 3], the avoidance unit is disposed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the ball hitting basket of the ball launching device that is the vibration generation source. Can be placed properly. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In the machine
A speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
The board having the connector member is arranged close to the speaker, and the voltage adding action by the contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to either the main control board or the panel relay board. An avoidance unit for avoiding
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high-output speaker when it becomes a vibration generation source. can do. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

  According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately disposed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the gaming members that are the vibration generation sources. it can. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

  The present invention is not limited to the circumstances described above, and in recent gaming machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effects. . As for these movable objects, the volume and the operation range tend to increase, and depending on the operation range, depending on the thing, the operation speed tends to increase, and the movable method is complicated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a vibration generation source, and the connector member is loosened, thereby generating contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of signals from the detection sensor unit and the panel relay board due to contact resistance.

  By the way, when a plurality of movable accessories are not in the initial position, there is a possibility that a predetermined effect cannot be started normally.

  Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effector, an origin position detection sensor (a photosensor consisting of a light projection type and a light reception type is often used) is directly incorporated in the movable effector or drive motor. In the mold, these detection signals are fed back to the control body and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the production control board and the drive board is also realized by a connector member and a harness connecting them.

  Although many specific illustrations have already been carried out, the illustration is omitted. However, for example, the arrangement position of the movable director in the game board surface is behind the upper part (initial position) of the game area 5a and behind the left side of the game area 5a. (Initial position), an initial position at the center of the game area 5a where the effect movable body is divided into left and right at the center of the game panel, or at the lower center of the game area 5a (behind the big prize opening unit, etc.) Depending on the type and version of the game machine, the position of the game machine will change variously in order to appeal the characteristics of the gaming machine.

  Now, if the transmission of driving data and signals for operating it and the origin detection signal cannot be correctly transmitted / received, it is possible that not only error detection cannot be performed but also there is a risk of erroneous transmission. . Here, it is considered that the avoidance unit 4166 described above is provided on the drive board at a later stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or provided on the signal input side of the peripheral control board 1510 on the control side (see FIG. 102). The

  As described above, even when an effect of rapidly combining at least two movable members is performed, there is a possibility that vibration due to the collision at that time may be transmitted violently, and even in this case, it is necessary to counter some countermeasures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), when performing intense heat production where the left and right movable members shown by hatching unite at the center of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board, It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the production movable body.

[Electric connection of origin position detection sensor, drive board and peripheral control board to control it]
FIG. 169 (A) is a basic configuration of mainly electrical connection of the peripheral position control board 1510, the panel relay board 3031 (drive board), the drive means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effector. FIG.

  The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the production, and is a board on which the peripheral control unit 1511 that is the production control subject is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a control subject for production, and the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the movable production body. The initial position (origin position detection sensor) information is input and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this information. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is for supplying a drive current corresponding to the drive signal to the drive means, and in addition, the origin for detecting the initial position for supplying the drive current according to the movable effector. The position detection is transferred to the panel relay board 3031 (drive board). As shown in FIG. 169 (A), transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505, and 4506.

  Since the positional relationship of the movable member for producing the vibration source and the positional relationship of the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) and the origin position detection sensor are various, one of them is “ The avoidance unit 4150 is disposed in consideration of an appropriate influence of whether the connector connection is loosened due to vibration. 169 (A) or 169 (B) can be provided as appropriate. As a result, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source and contact resistance is generated by these, errors in signals from the origin position detection sensor 4000 and the drive board due to the contact resistance are generated. Detection can be avoided.

  Note that when operating the movable accessory, loose connection of the connector on the drive means, origin position detection sensor unit, drive board, and peripheral control board connected by the connector was considered as a problem. It is also applied when a ball launcher and a speaker are considered as a vibration source.

[Grouping of movable actors for multiple productions]
As described above, in game machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effects. About these movable accessories, the volume and the operation range tend to increase, and depending on the operation range, depending on the thing, the operation speed tends to expand, and the movable method is complicated. Furthermore, the movable ranges for different movable actors may intersect.

  For example, when an abnormality occurs in one of the plurality of movable accessories that does not return to the initial position where the operation starts when the production starts, the operation state of the other movable combinations is almost taken into consideration. The current situation is not. If the return operation is performed only with a movable combination in which an abnormality has occurred without considering other movable combinations, there is a possibility of interfering with the other movable combination. If this happens, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be lowered and the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Here, in order to use the movable combination for the production, it is necessary to restore all the movable combinations to the initial positions. In addition, when an accessory is not intended and is stopped at a location other than the initial position for some reason, an operation is performed to restore the movable accessory to the initial position. If you do not consider that the movable range of movable objects intersect like in this way, when performing a recovery operation, it physically interferes with other movable objects and restores all movable objects to their initial positions. May not be possible. In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from the normal vibration may occur due to the physical interference of the movable accessory. However, since the avoiding unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. In the substrate 1510, erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

  Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to reliably restore a plurality of actors to their initial positions, the movable actors whose operation ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. The movable actors in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial position where each movable actor starts the operation for starting the production. As described above, by performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence, it is possible to reliably perform recovery from a location other than the initial position.

  In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessories is movable within an operation range from an initial position where an operation for production is started to an operation position until the operation for production is completed. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable accessories is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operation ranges of the respective movable combinations do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the operation ranges are mutually different. It contains a plurality of movable objects that interfere.

Each of the plurality of movable accessories includes an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) that detects at least an initial position set in advance. In addition to the initial position detection sensor that can detect the operation start position for production, the position detection sensor may further include a position detection sensor that detects an intermediate position of the operation range or an end position of the operation range. Good.
The peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined position (initial position, midway position, or end position) as described above even in one of a plurality of movable combinations in a group including a plurality of movable combinations whose operation ranges interfere with each other. When there is an abnormality that is not detected, each movable accessory does not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial position that is the start position of the operation for starting the production. Thus, according to a predetermined operation sequence, all movable members in the group are restored to their initial positions.

  FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, a plurality of movable accessories for production arranged in the back production unit 3100 and a grouping of the plurality of movable actors. As shown in FIG. 170, an accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged at the center of the pachinko machine 1, and an accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 1, An accessory group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is disposed on the left side of the machine 1, and an accessory group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is disposed substantially at the center of the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and at the lower approximate center of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided with an accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008). That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five accessory groups.

  The five accessory groups 01 to 05 do not physically interfere with each other within the operating range. More specifically, the actor group 01 is composed of a mask actor, a fuselage deformed left actor, a fuselage deformed right actor, a fuselage storage-appearing agent, an upper liquid crystal driving agent, and a lower liquid crystal driving agent. Yes. The accessory group 02 is composed only of the right shoulder accessory, the accessory group 03 is composed only of the left shoulder accessory, the accessory group 04 is composed only of the facial accessory, and the accessory group 05 is composed only of the pop-up accessory. Has been.

  Therefore, the movable combination with which the operation range for production physically interferes is made into the same group. In the above example, a masked character belonging to the character group 01, a torso deformed left character, a torso deformed right character, a torso storage-appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, and a lower liquid crystal driving character Are supposed to interfere with each other.

[Restoring operation of movable accessory to initial position (called “correction of accessory”)]
If even one of the movable actors in the accessory group has an abnormality, all of the movable actors in the group are operated and restored to the initial position in a predetermined operation sequence. For example, check the photo status of all the motors when the state changes or when the change starts, and if there is a problem (for example, if it is detected that the motor is not in the initial position) Using the motor sequence data for performing the correction operation for all the objects, the object is restored to the correct position.

  In this embodiment, for the accessory group 02 to the accessory group 05, since there is only one movable accessory belonging to each accessory group, other accessory groups are restored during the recovery operation to the initial position. Does not physically interfere with each other, the accessory correction operation may be performed in parallel for each accessory group. Regarding the accessory group 01, since there are six movable actors belonging to the accessory group 01, it is determined in advance so that the movable actors in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial position. Must be performed in the specified operation sequence.

  Hereinafter, an example of the accessory correction operation in the accessory group 01 will be described. In this example, when there is an abnormality in which the initial position is not detected in any one of the plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 is physically connected during the recovery operation to the initial position. In accordance with a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere, all movable actors in the group are operated and restored to their initial positions.

  More specifically, when it is determined that one of the movable actors in the accessory group 01 is abnormal in photo, the actions of all the actors in the group are stopped. Note that the photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The corrective action in the group is not limited to the movable accessory at the problem location, but all the movable features in the group to which the problematic movable accessory belongs using the predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data. By restoring the objects to their initial positions, the problematic movable accessory is restored to the correct initial position.

  The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the driving order of the motor to be driven and the operation time thereof (in other words, the driving start timing and the driving end timing). The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 Is remembered. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory group 01, there are six movable actors. Therefore, the motors as driving sources for driving these six movable actors are motor A (masked accessory) and motor B (fuselage deformation), respectively. Left hand), motor C (fuselage deformed right hand), motor D (fuselage storage-appearing hand), motor E (upper liquid crystal drive), motor F (lower liquid crystal drive). To do.

  When performing the recovery operation to the initial position regardless of the accessory group, the motors to be driven may be sequentially driven one by one. In the case where general interference cannot occur, a plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start timing may be shifted and driven together, or a plurality of drives may be driven simultaneously.

  For example, assume that a photo anomaly has been detected for the fuselage storage-appearing character (motor D). FIG. 171 is a timing chart in the case of performing the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 171, the recovery operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is first driven, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

  At the same time, that is, at the time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously driven at time t2. Thereafter, at time t3, the motor B and the motor C are stopped at the same time. Thereafter, at time t4, the motor E and the motor F are stopped at the same time. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Thus, the driving of the motor D is stopped at time t5. That is, the recovery operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that the stoppage of driving of each motor is conditional on normal photo detection.

  In addition, when two or more actor groups are performing a recovery operation to an initial position (referred to as an accessory correction operation), the movement ranges of movable actors physically interfere with each other in different groups. In the case where there is not, the accessory correction operation may be performed for two accessory groups in parallel.

  In addition, when one accessory group is performing the recovery operation to the initial position (referred to as an accessory correction operation), for other accessory groups that do not interfere with each other, the accessory group performing the accessory correction operation The production may be continued by performing the production operation regardless of the production. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to interrupt the effect using a movable accessory as a gaming machine, and the effect can be continued.

  In addition, it is necessary to perform an action correction operation in this accessory group due to an abnormality in one accessory group. However, in the case of production, an accessory group determined to be required to perform an accessory correction operation. The effect correction operation may not be performed, and the performance may be performed only by the movable accessory of another accessory group. Then, after the effect of only the movable accessory of another accessory group is finished, the accessory correction operation of the accessory group determined to be necessary to perform the accessory correction operation is performed. This also makes it possible to perform the performance continuously without interrupting the performance using the movable combination as a gaming machine.

[Start timing for performing the recovery operation to the initial position]
The start timing for performing the recovery operation to the initial position of the accessory is when the power is turned on, at the start of fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, when the demo is disclosed, at the end of the demonstration, when the door is opened, when the door is closed, etc. Conceivable.

  When turning on the power, make sure to perform the feature correction operation for all the feature groups. For this reason, the accessory effect operation related to the notice or effect at the time of change is not performed until the accessory correction operation at power-on is completed. The start timing of the accessory correction operation related to the notice or effect at the time of change is valid from the next change when the accessory correction operation at power-on is completed. In addition, the accessory correction operation when the power is turned on is always executed for all the accessories regardless of whether each accessory is at the origin.

  At the time of turning on the power, for example, (1) perform a minimum operation of the accessory on the side opposite to the initial position, and remove the photo. (2) Next, the accessory is moved to the initial position to detect the photo. (1) and (2) are executed for all the objects. According to this, it is possible to reliably perform the effect operation by the movable accessory during the game after the game is started.

  In addition, regarding the point that the start timing of the accessory correction operation of the accessory group is a big hit ending, in the case where there are six movable accessories such as the accessory group 001, the bonus group 001 during the jackpot game Although it takes some time to perform the accessory correction operation, since the big hit game itself has ended, it is possible to reassure the player that the accessory correction operation of the accessory group 001 is not related to the game.

[Retry while performing an object correction operation]
When performing an action effect, initial operation at power-on, or an action to move to the origin (photo side) by performing an action correction operation, when a photo cannot be detected, for example, movable objects collide with each other. If it does not go well, it counts one, and when it reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, a total of 5 counts, it includes a function and a function that has become a photo anomaly until the next power-on. The entire object group is not movable. Although the count is 5 times, the count is 5 times continuously, and therefore the count number returns to “0” when the photo detection is normal (detected) even once.

  If the retry operation of the above-mentioned accessory correction operation is performed and a photo is detected, the normal performance is restored. However, even if the retry operation of the above-mentioned accessory correction operation (five times in the above example) is executed, the photo is restored. If it cannot be detected, the accessory correction operation of the accessory group determined to be necessary to perform the accessory correction operation is not performed, only the movable accessory of the other accessory group that can perform the rendering operation normally. You may make it act by acting.

In addition, when performing an accessory correction operation, when the number of times that a photo cannot be detected even if an operation for moving the movable accessory to the origin (photo side) is consecutively determined to be a predetermined number of times, it is determined that there is a photo abnormality, In the example, the role that has become abnormal and the entire feature group that includes that feature are made unmovable. However, the predetermined number of times, which is the criterion for determining photo anomalies, is changed from the preset standard number to the hole. You may comprise so that a salesclerk can change to arbitrary frequency | counts.
As a result, when an abnormality occurs in an accessory due to the discovery of a defect after shipment or deterioration over time, and it becomes necessary to deal with this, it is possible to set an appropriate number of retries on the hall side. For example, in the case of frequent photo anomalies, setting the number of retries less than the standard number can reduce the occurrence of a situation where a complicated retry operation is observed by the player and the player's interest is cut off. It becomes possible.

Whether or not to perform the retry operation may be set for each type of the accessory group for the movable accessory in the accessory group. In this case, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, not only the performance by the movable object not related to the main game (game contents directly related to the winning) being performed on the main control board 1310 but also the main game (substantial to the winning). There are things that produce effects by moving objects related to (game content related to). If a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of the movable items in the bonus group, a retry operation will be performed for movable features in the bonus group that do not interfere with the game. It may not be possible. On the other hand, an effect by a movable accessory related to the game (a game content that is supplementarily related to the winning) (notifying in advance that it will be a big hit, or notifying in advance that it will be probable) In the case of an accessory group including a movable accessory), if a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of the movable actors in this accessory group, a retry operation is performed.
If it does in this way, it can be expected that the player can be relieved, and an effect that a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed can be expected.

  Moreover, you may set whether to perform retry operation according to the kind of production to perform. For example, in the case of using a movable accessory for directing a game state that is advantageous for the player, such as during a big hit game, for the purpose of exciting the fun of the game by directing, for the accessory group to which the movable accessory used belongs, Try retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal game state or a reach state with low expectation, it is possible not to perform a retry operation for movable objects that are not related to the game (game contents directly related to the win). It is.

[Notification of abnormal operation of movable accessory when photo abnormality is detected]
It is conceivable that some kind of notification is performed when the movable accessory breaks down (including when the wiring connected to control the accessory is disconnected). When the movable accessory fails, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, “It is an accessory failure” in a band shape. The notification is started when the movable accessory is the accessory stop process (5 times counting) at the time of photo abnormality.

  In addition, regarding the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, in addition to the display, the notification may be performed by sound. For the notification of the failure, how to combine the sound and the display depending on the type of failure, etc. May be changed.

  In addition, when not only a plurality of movable accessories or a board surface, but also a movable body provided in a frame, for example, it may be notified individually for each movable accessory or movable body. May be notified collectively. At this time, in the case of individually informing, the effect display device may be displayed side by side so that the failure location can be specified. You may make it alert | report that it is out of order.

  For example, when the RAM is initialized in addition to the failure of the movable accessory or the movable body, the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period. In the case where the situations to be notified overlap, it is better to give priority to the RAM clear notification as a situation that needs to be preferentially sounded, especially for voice. At this time, after a RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, an accessory failure is notified.

[Another action when photo anomaly is detected]
As a countermeasure when a movable accessory breaks down, as described above, even if an accessory correction operation, which is a recovery operation to the initial position, is performed or an operation is performed to move to the origin by performing an accessory correction operation, When detection is not possible, retry operation is performed up to a predetermined number of times. However, even if retry is performed a predetermined number of times, if the object still cannot return to the origin and the photo cannot be detected, the object of the object group where the failure occurred An example of continuing the effect production operation for an accessory in an accessory group in which no failure has occurred will be described.

  As already described with reference to the block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. And a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Among them, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and controls each effect device based on the commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is done. A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not all the objects constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05 are in the reference position, that is, there is an abnormality in the accessories constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05. Determine if it has not occurred.
Then, when it is determined that all the actors constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, the normal accessory control is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the actor group 01, a mask actor, a fuselage deformed left actor, a fuselage deformed right actor, a fuselage storage and one appearing actor, an upper liquid crystal driving accessory, It consists of a liquid crystal driving agent. For example, depending on where the abnormality occurs when an abnormality occurs in the fuselage deformation left accessory, the stop position of the fuselage deformation left accessory hinders the recovery operation to the origin position of the fuselage deformation right accessory, There are cases where all the objects cannot be returned to the origin position even if retries are repeated, resulting in an unrecoverable obstacle. At this time, a flag indicating that it is in an unrecoverable state is provided for each accessory group in a RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is activated. 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to the accessory group that is in the unrecoverable state.

Here, as already described, the respective accessory groups are grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if any of the accessory groups becomes unrecoverable, it is possible to continue driving the other accessory groups.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the accessory group that has become unrecoverable is left as it is, and the accessory effect is continued using the accessory belonging to the other accessory groups.

  Specifically, a flag indicating that the state cannot be recovered is read from a RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511. When the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups is 0, it is determined that no failure that cannot be recovered has occurred in any of the accessory groups, and after performing the origin return operation, Continue to perform the effect.

  When 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups, it is determined that a failure that cannot be recovered has occurred in the accessory group. In such a case, processing for stopping the operation by stopping the continuation of the return operation is performed for an accessory belonging to the accessory group in which the flag is set to 1 and an unrecoverable failure has occurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption due to excessive operation of the motor and failure of the accessory by repeatedly performing the return operation even though the return is impossible.

  Here, the accessory may be an accessory that makes a production operation by operating the member, but in addition to the operation of the member, in addition to the operation, a light emitting member is provided on the member of the accessory. It is also possible to produce an effect by light emission, or to form the accessory itself with a translucent member and to produce an effect of causing the accessory to emit light by a light emitting member such as an LED provided inside the accessory. is there.

  Here, when the driving signal for driving the accessory and the light emission signal for emitting the LED that decorates the accessory are separated from each other and both can be controlled independently, an unrecoverable failure has occurred. For an accessory belonging to the accessory group, the continuation of the return operation is stopped and the operation is stopped. However, even if the operation of the accessory is stopped, the light emitting member provided in the accessory or the accessory is stopped. Since the light emission control for emitting light itself can be performed without affecting the interference of the action of the accessory, it can be continuously performed. At this time, the effect control that should be originally performed may be performed. As a result, even for an accessory belonging to an accessory group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred, it is possible to continue to produce a certain amount of performance by continuing the light emission control.

  As another method, for an accessory belonging to an accessory group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred, the light emitting member provided in the accessory or the accessory itself is caused to emit light while stopping the operation of the accessory. In the light emission control, the light emission control according to the location where the failure that cannot be recovered, the type of failure, and the like can be performed instead of the effect control that should be performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the location and the kind of failure which generate | occur | produced the failure with the light emission mode of the accessory which has stopped operation | movement.

  Then, for an accessory group whose flag is 0, that is, an accessory belonging to an accessory group in which an unrecoverable failure has not occurred, an accessory operation control is performed as usual. If an obstacle occurs in some of the objects, and the entire action control of the action is stopped, the action of the action will be completely stopped, which may reduce the interest of the player. By leaving the features belonging to the feature group in which the failure has occurred as they are, and driving the features of the feature group that do not physically interfere with the features of the unrecoverable feature group, Compared with the case of completely stopping the accessory action, it is possible to perform the accessory action control that enhances the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, for the notification of the abnormal operation of the movable accessory, when the movable accessory fails (not only the failure of the movable accessory itself, but also the wiring connected to control the movable accessory is disconnected) In some cases, it may be possible to provide some kind of notification. As an example of notification when a movable accessory breaks down, there is a method of displaying, for example, “It is an accessory failure” on the effect display device 1600 in a band shape. In addition, when a plurality of abnormalities such as a connector abnormality and a movable accessory operation abnormality are detected as described later, each of the detected abnormality can be displayed. It is also possible to display in order from the abnormality having the highest importance.

To detect that a movable accessory has failed and is unable to return, perform the accessory correction operation and count it when no photo can be detected even after moving to the origin, and then retry several times. Do. Even if the accessory correction operation is performed a predetermined number of times (as an example, 5 times), if still photo detection is not possible, it is assumed that the recovery is impossible, and the notification is started when the recovery is impossible.
Further, in the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, not only notification by the display in the effect display device 1600 described above, but also notification by sound may be performed. In addition, as a notification method, notification by display, notification by sound, and notification by a combination of both may be mixed. As a selection method of these notification methods, a method of combining sound and display according to the type of failure Etc. may be changed. Furthermore, you may alert | report by vibration using the vibration speaker mentioned later. For example, when a plurality of abnormalities are detected, it is possible to make a setting so that abnormalities with high importance are notified by display on the effect display device 1600 and abnormalities with low importance are notified by sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that display notification or sound notification is performed more than necessary during a game in which a game is being performed. Therefore, it is preferable that the notification of the failure of the movable accessory is made only by display during the game, or the volume is reduced even if the notification is made by sound.
In this case, it is not necessary to give consideration to surrounding players and the like as long as it is before starting a hall business that is not in a game. Therefore, for the purpose of notifying the hall personnel, it is programmed and set in advance so that the operation abnormality of the movable accessory can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and in that case, both the display and sound are used for easy understanding. You may make it notify a hall official concerned. Thus, about the form of alerting | reporting, it is good to set also about the period.

There are various types of halls, such as large stores with hundreds of units and small stores with few units. In particular, when there are few hall-related persons in a large-scale store with a large number of units, there is a case where the accessory correction operation cannot be confirmed for all the tables one by one. Even in such a case, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the failure more easily by setting the notification and the sound so as to be easily understood by the hall personnel. And when it becomes clear that a failure has occurred in the movable accessory, it becomes possible to pay for the failure by re-turning on the power or repairing it again by the hall personnel. .

In addition, as in the above-described inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker during the RAM clear notification period, it is also possible to execute the accessory correction operation when the RAM clear process and the RAM clear notification command are received. It is.

  Also, an abnormality such as a movable accessory provided at the lower part of the gaming machine (for example, a pop-up accessory of the accessory group 05) does not return to the origin due to a foreign object such as a game ball B or dust being caught If the vibration is detected, the vibration speaker 354 generates a vibration that is transmitted to the movable accessory, and the control unit executes the origin position restoration process that prompts the restoration of the movable accessory to the origin position. Good.

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, description will be given later regarding automatic channel sound control, which is a part of sound data creation processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 16 ms). Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of top central speakers 462 for the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. In addition, each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, while the number of combinations of sounds that are scheduled to be output is determined for each channel. When the number of channels exceeds the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output via each channel dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 172 (A) and FIG. 172 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 172 shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 172 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until any end of the playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to a connector abnormality or the like, the sound control of the classification “abnormality notification sound” and the sound name “sensor abnormality detection” is performed.

In addition, when the abnormality of the initial position detection sensor (photo sensor) for detecting the initial position (origin position) of the movable accessory is detected, that is, when the operation abnormality of the movable accessory is detected, the “abnormal alarm sound” ”And the sound control of the sound name“ sensor abnormality detection ”.
If it is desired to distinguish between the abnormality of the connector and the operation abnormality of the movable accessory, for example, in FIG. 173, ch02 is currently assigned as the sound name “sensor abnormality detection”. For detecting an abnormality of the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected, a dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel, such as additionally assigning ch03. At this time, in order to reliably notify the abnormality detection, it is preferable to assign the abnormality detection to the fixed channel when the fixed channel and the automatic channel are used together.

  In addition, when different types of abnormality are overlapped when distinguished according to the type of abnormality, the importance of the type of abnormality may be determined in advance. For example, when the priority is set so that the importance decreases in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, if these abnormalities are duplicated, the importance is high and the highest priority is notified. You may make it alert | report the notification sound ("RAM was cleared") which specifies RAM clear which must be done.

In this case, among the abnormalities that have occurred in duplicate, because the importance of notification is higher than the abnormality with low importance for the abnormality with high importance, the abnormality with low importance is not immediately notified, Memorize the occurrence of an abnormality, and after the abnormality of high importance is resolved, or after the elapse of a predetermined period after starting the notification of abnormality of high importance, the abnormality of low importance memorized A notification sound (“Magnetic detection has been detected” or “Functional item failure”) may be notified until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined period.

When there are duplicated abnormalities and notifications are made sequentially, notifications are made in descending order of importance, and notification of the next highest importance abnormality is made after the notification of the abnormality having the highest importance is completed. Notifications may be performed sequentially, but the notification period of the low-priority abnormality notification sound is set to be long, and the importance is low in combination with the notification sound that identifies the abnormality having high importance from when the abnormality occurred Increase the volume of the high-priority notification sound and lower the volume of the low-priority notification sound so that you can hear the high-priority notification sound better at the beginning while notifying the abnormal notification sound In other words, at the end of the notification period of the abnormality with high importance, the volume is increased so that the notification sound for specifying the abnormality with low importance can be heard well, until the abnormality is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined It is also possible to notify the period.

Also, if the timing of the occurrence of the abnormality is different, for example, the magnetism is detected while the fact that the accessory is in failure ("It is an accessory failure") is reported due to the occurrence of an accessory failure. Thus, in order to notify that the magnetism has been detected (“magnetism has been detected”), the order of notification is changed based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the notification mode is switched from “abnormality of an accessory” to “magnetic detected”. When the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the failure of the accessory is notified again.

About the kind of abnormality, importance is set low in order of RAM clear, magnetism detection, and accessory abnormality according to importance. For other abnormalities, it is possible to set the order of importance as appropriate according to the respective abnormalities.
As for the notification mode, sound, display, or a combination of sound and display may be used for notification. For example, in the above-described example, while announcing by voice, the display device displays “It is an accessory abnormality”. The failure is notified by voice. With the sound, the sound and the display, etc., the speaker and the display device used for the production are used, and the notification mode is switched according to the situation. In particular, for display devices, in recent years, a plurality of small liquid crystals have been used as effects devices, but for the main display device that displays abnormal situations on the small display devices and displays lottery symbols, It is advisable not to display it so as not to interfere with the game as much as possible.

  The left and right pan initial value is the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents. By changing the left and right pan settings dynamically during sound playback, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper left speaker and upper right speaker, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. I can do it. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is output. For example, when “0x80” is set, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are output. Thus, the difference in volume output individually from is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xff” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker outputs.

  The initial value of the up / down pan represents, for example, the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the single body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only a pair of upper speakers. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers, which is a combination thereof, is 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xff” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the body frame speaker 622 which is the lower speaker.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, within a setting range of “0x00” to “0xff”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 174 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  175 (A) shows an example of the production time chart, FIG. 175 (B) shows an example of the channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 175 (C) cannot be reproduced when attempting to reproduce each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 175A to 175C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 175 (A), the game state along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, is “change first half”, “fluctuate second half”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit”. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 175 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “first half notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 172 (B), as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 172 (B), as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 (A) and FIG. 176 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as this embodiment.

  FIG. 176 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 176 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group.
When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group.
If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds having a priority of “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

As already described, the left and right pan initial values are the sound from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents the initial position of sound image localization. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information.
For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (top center speaker 462 and topside speaker 464) of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 outputs, and for example, setting “0x80”. The difference in volume output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xff” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans represents the initial position of sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the single body frame speaker 622, for example. By changing the left and right pan settings dynamically during sound playback, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. I can do it. The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers formed by a combination thereof. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xff” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the body frame speaker 622 which is the lower speaker.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xff”. In addition, “1” (0x1ff if 0xff) is added to the third byte. ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 178 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 178 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In these FIGS. 178A and 178B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 178 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), for example, the “normal BGM playback” sound is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start prize (corresponding to “the pending prize” shown in the figure) and the player tries to reproduce the pending winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated. As shown in FIG. 179B, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as a result of searching for an empty channel. Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 180 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is “0”, while the channel is automatically allocated when it is “1” (see “Sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans.

  FIG. 181 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 181, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100), the production control program checks an automatic assignment group for the new sound (step S1102). If this automatic assignment group is “0”, fixed assignment is performed. And start playing a new sound on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (mono) channel (1 channel) (step S1108). ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound is reproduced in the (mono) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not a channel exists (step S1110).

  The production control program terminates the processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound that is equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (mono) channel being reproduced, while Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when there is not a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel that satisfies a desired condition (step S1116).

  On the other hand, if the production control program determines in step S1106 described above that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether there are vacant (stereo) channels (two channels) (step S1106). S1120). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step) S1124) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, overwriting of the sound being reproduced with the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, if there is a production control program, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the new sound starts to be reproduced on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

  FIG. 182 (A) and FIG. 182 (B) to FIG. 185 (A) and FIG. 185 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 182 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM playback request with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 02 to 03 in response to the request for playback of the sound effect of the first half notice_A whose priority is 05. Therefore, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for a button pressing sound having a priority of 20, and assigns it to the playback channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a play request for a big hit definite sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 08-09 to Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy in .about.11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning tone with a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the play channels 12 to 13 to the search. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIG. 186 (A) and FIG. 186 (B) to FIG. 189 (A) and FIG. 189 (B) show examples of specific contents of the empty channel search processing, respectively. As shown in FIG. 186 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a reach BGM with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the effect control program next, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), the free channel is triggered by the occurrence of a request for playback of the full-screen warning sound having the priority of 10. Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 with priority 25 is generated, and FIG. 187 (A) shows. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since this corresponds to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure, there is an empty space, and the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing an accessory sound with a priority of 10 is generated, and plays channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. For this reason, use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 reproducing the “pending winning sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound in stereo is started.

In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Will be played on the playback channel found in the search.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can an empty channel be effectively used as described above, but also each of the sounds scheduled to be output is made as much as possible using each channel including the empty channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  190 (A) and 190 (B) to 191 (A) and 191 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 190 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is generated, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  When the sound replacement playback according to the priority order occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played back before the replacement in the playback channel after the playback is completed. Needless to say, it can be done.

[Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIG. 192 (A) to FIG. 192 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel assignment in sound control based on the above-described two types of channel systems or combinations thereof.

  FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 192 (B) shows this. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 (C) shows an embodiment (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure) in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used and channels are allocated to the maximum number of playback channels, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method. . FIG. 192 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for the some reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 192 (E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of playback channels and to perform sound control by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel method illustrated in FIG. 192E will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 192 (F) shows a case in which a single automatic channel group is used to assign channels to the maximum number of playback channels and perform sound control by the automatic channel method, and some of the playback channels have the fixed channel method. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel method illustrated in FIG. 192F will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped, empty channels are allocated or output channels are replaced based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods in which sound is output by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, it is possible to reliably output the sound repeatedly. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (D), the preferentially output sound and the always output sound are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or the change display is displayed. Output in automatic channel mode.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively use empty channels by the automatic channel method and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Moreover, since it becomes possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 192 (C) and 192 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method illustrated in FIG. 192 (E) will be described in detail.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes channels that reproduce sound using a fixed channel method and channels that reproduce sound using an automatic channel method. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, the sound source control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “Remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 193 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel number”, which is “channel” channel number + 1), is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound that is used by all manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is activated. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 5 are channels used for outputting BGM, and channel 6 and channel 7 are channels paired with channel 5 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

  In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  When a sound is output during the execution of the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, setting is made so as to output the sound designated from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, based on a predetermined condition, the used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can do.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of empty channel search processing in the case of executing control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment. FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 194 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Note that description of common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not an empty channel exists in the channel of the same group when the new sound is the automatic channel method in the processes of steps S1108 and S1120. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108 and step S1120 are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 194, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, a channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound with higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of sound change during playback, etc. Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 181, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. Thus, by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of reproduction, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, an effect with a shorter playback time is selected because an effect with a higher expectation can be achieved with an effect with a longer playback time. On the other hand, the influence on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by canceling the effects having a long playback time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the playback time. In addition to this, for example, the sound output of a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progression ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be a highly important effect, and therefore, a channel with a small volume of sound being output is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected and the player may be made aware that a new performance will be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a sound to be faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel on the basis of a dynamic change of the sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position can be considered to be a more important performance that can produce a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the left and right sound output of a stereo speaker. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, the priority order may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect output with stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since the monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of empty channels is not enough even if the channels that output the monaural sound are opened, a channel that outputs stereo sound is selected to increase the number of empty channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted.
For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. In addition, by assigning unique priorities to all sounds, the production data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 195, the conditions from 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 196 is a timing chart illustrating an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) indicates the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) indicates the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 196, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the priority order of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority order of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority order of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the announcement effect with a low priority is executed repeatedly in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppressed volume value. Reduced.

  The contents of each notice will be described. For example, the first notice_A is an effect in which a character appears. A character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and a button press sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect from the channels 10 and 11 in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and a sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily displayed. Is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority order of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority order of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  Note that if the priority order of the notice effect that is executed later is lower than or the same as the priority order of the notice effect that is being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects that are output at the same time It is not necessary to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the output of the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that are muted from time t3 is resumed at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_B ends at time t7, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and reducing the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being played back on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). Further, the volume of the sound being played back on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. Sounds with a high priority are, for example, sounds that are surely transmitted to players and game hall employees, such as notification sounds and warning sounds, and the expectation that the result of variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effects to increase the expectation of the game, or sound effects that have a high stage effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily manage production data related to production sound effects by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups.
As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. Further, by making a stable game possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) for outputting a sound effect of a notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) for outputting a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1, it is possible to maximize the fun of the game by outputting the effect sound effect having the lower priority order while replacing the effect effect sound having the lower priority order. .

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, the automatic channel method makes effective use of a finite number of channels by searching for available channels, and gives priority to output effects and high-priority sounds by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when a sound is continuously output as in BGM or when a sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a gaming machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of sound, each channel can be used effectively, and further appropriate control according to the sound output status can be performed. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is only necessary to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is not searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while the volume is lowered without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Moreover, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Here, the sound source IC used for playing sound effects and BGM is also used for driving the vibration speaker 354 described above. By providing sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the effect operation unit 301 is vibrated.

  The provision of sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is intended to vibrate the production operation unit 301. Therefore, the channel may be set each time the production operation unit 301 is operated. Then, although it is the same sound information, in order to avoid confusion on the nature of sound information such as sound effects and BGM that actually emit sound, a fixed channel is assigned and assigned to a channel dedicated to the vibration speaker.

Moreover, as described above, the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to is a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweep) eight times in one second in about 1 Hz each in a unit of 1 Hz. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM as sound information input again after 1 second.
Furthermore, as described above, the volume is emphasized by increasing the volume for the high-priority production by controlling the volume, but the intensity of vibration is also 40 Hz ± 2 Hz as in the case of the volume. The amplitude of the sine wave is increased or decreased, and the vibration is gradually increased or decreased, and the volume of the sound is adjusted in the same way as adjusting the volume of the sound. I also use it.

  Note that the sound source IC has been expressed as a single device having only that function. However, in the effect display control unit, a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600 has a function corresponding to the sound source IC. Even in such a case, vibration can be controlled as long as the same sound control as described above can be performed. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be hybridized, or information used for each may be stored in advance as the same device. Further, the CPU and the control ROM for controlling these may be configured by the same device.

  [15-2. Modification of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed] In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are set in advance. In this modification, a modification in which the number of channels for which the automatic channel system is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel system is set is variable will be described.

[Example of production]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be temporarily allocated. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, nine divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 199 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously.
The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Further, the default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 200A is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 193 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 200 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. When a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and playback of other BGMs is terminated. . When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM volume of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the second half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment. Indicates.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 200A) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 200B )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 200B) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 192F) that performs sound control by the fixed channel method and automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 192 (F) “corresponding to“ variable AUTOch ”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. Flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

  In the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. Even in this case, the same effects as the above-described effects can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 10 Outer frame left assembly 11 Outer frame left member 11a Recessed part 11b Swelling part 11c Cavity part 12 Upper left connection member 12a Horizontal fixing part 12b Upper horizontal fixing Part 12c Lower horizontal fixing part 13 Left lower connecting member 13a Horizontal fixing part 13b Upper horizontal fixing part 13c Lower horizontal fixing part 13d Abutting part 20 Outer frame right assembly 21 Outer frame right member 21a Recessed part 21b Swelling part 21c Cavity part 22 Upper right Connecting member 22a Horizontal fixing portion 22b Upper horizontal fixing portion 22c Lower horizontal fixing portion 23 Right lower connecting member 23a Horizontal fixing portion 23b Upper horizontal fixing portion 23c Lower horizontal fixing portion 23d Abutting portion 24 Upper hook member 24a Mounting portion 24b Latching piece Part 25 Lower hook member 25a Mounting part 25b Hanging piece part 25c Insert port 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notch part 30b Mounting step part 40 Outer frame lower assembly 40a Curtain plate internal space 41 Outer frame lower member 41a Notch portion 41b Recess 42 Curtain plate front member 42a Opening portion 43 Curtain plate rear member 43a Connection cylinder portion 43b Rib 44 Ball engagement prevention mechanism 44a Placement portion 44b First discharge port 44c Second Ejection port 44d Standing wall portion 44e Upper end protruding portion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame upper hinge assembly 51 Outer frame upper hinge member 51a Upper fixing portion 51b Front extension portion 51c Bearing groove 51d Lateral fixing portion 51e Edge wall portion 52 Lock member 52a Lock body 52b Operation piece 52c Elastic portion 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Outer frame lower hinge member 60a Horizontal portion 60b Upright portion 60c Outer frame lower hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Door frame base unit 101 Door frame base 101a Door window 101b Handle attachment seat surface 101c Insertion recessed part 101d Cylinder insertion hole 101e Ball feed opening 101f Lower plate ball passage port 101g Upper plate ball passage port 101h Glass unit attachment part 101i Slit 101j Through-hole 102 Handle mounting portion 102a Tube portion 102b Flange portion 102c Projection 102d Reinforcement rib 103 Speaker duct 103a Cable holder 104 Door frame main relay board 105 Door frame sub relay board 106 Rear relay board 107 Door frame relay board cover 108 Door Rear frame relay board cover 109 Cable cover 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame reinforcement unit 111 Left reinforcement frame 112 Right reinforcement frame 113 Upper reinforcement frame 114 Intermediate reinforcement frame 114a Notch portion 114b Through portion 115 Cylinder mounting frame 116 Hook member 120 Door frame hinge assembly 121 Hinge bracket 121a Mounting piece 121b Projecting piece 122 Door frame upper hinge pin 123 Hook member 124 Lock spring 125 Door frame lower hinge member 125a Mounting piece 125b Projecting piece 126 Door frame hinge pin

130 Cylinder Lock 131 Cylinder Body 132 Keyhole 133 Rotation Transmission Member

140 Ball feeding unit 141 Front cover 141a Advance entrance 141b Ball exit 141c Slit 141e Ball feed opening 142 Rear cover 142a Hitting ball feed port 142b Mounting recess 143 Ball withdrawal member 143a Partition portion 143b Rotating collar 143c Operating rod 143d Weight portion Sphere feeding member 144a Blocking portion 144b Sphere holding portion 144c 棹 portion 145 Sphere feeding solenoid 146 Sphere feeding operating rod 146a Iron plate 147 Sphere feeding crank 147a Engaging portion 147b Shaft portion 147c Transmission portion 148 Fraud prevention member 148a Upper piece portion 148b Lower piece 148c Inclined part

150 foul cover unit 150a through ball passage 150b full ball receiving port 150c foul ball receiving port 150d ball discharge port 150e storage passage 150f door opening / closing contact portion

151 Unit body 152 Lid member 153 Movable piece 154 Full detection sensor 155 Spring

160 Glass unit 161a Mounting piece 161b Locking piece 161 Glass frame 162 Glass plate 163 Glass unit mounting member 163b Protruding part 163a Base

170 Crime prevention cover 171 Main body 172 Rear protrusion 173 Locking piece

180 Handle unit 181 Handle base 181a Base 181b Front end 181c Groove 182 Handle 182a First protrusion 182b Second protrusion 182c Third protrusion 182d Fourth protrusion 182e Slit 182f Locking protrusion 183 Cover base 183a Handle decoration board 184 Handle mounting board 184 Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 Single button 194 Single button operation sensor

200 dish unit 201 upper dish 201a guide passage part 201b ground metal fitting 202 lower dish 202a lower dish ball hole 210 dish base unit 211 dish unit base 211a upper dish ball supply port 211b speaker port 211c lower dish ball supply port 211d cutout part 211e upper plate Ball feeding port 211f Mounting projection 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Top plate ball supply port

212 Upper plate body 212a Production operation unit mounting portion 213 Mounting base 213a Insertion port 213b Through port 214 Dish unit relay board 220 Ball lending operation unit 221 Base portion 222 Top plate ball removal button 223 Ball lending operation base 224 Ball lending button 225 Return button 230 Pre-top ball removal unit 231 Front base 232 Front slider 240 Post-top ball removal unit 241 Rear base 241a Ball receiving port 241b Ball feed guide path 241c Ball removal guide path 242 Upper dish ball removal slider 242a Actuation receiving portion 242b Actuation Transmission part 243 Spring 244 Rear cover 250 Dish decoration unit 251 Lower dish body 252 Dish unit body 252a Upper side bulging part 252b Lower front decoration part 252c Bottom plate part 252d Lower dish opening part 252e Front notch part 252f Bottom notch part 252g Noodle insertion port 252h Cylinder insertion port 252i Production operation unit mounting portion 260 Lower dish ball removal unit 261 Lower dish ball removal base 262 Slider 263 Lower dish ball removal button 264 Spring 265 Lower dish ball removal lid 266 Holding mechanism 270 Dish left upper decoration unit 271 Dish upper left decorative body 272 Dish left upper reflector 273 Dish upper left decorative board 275 Dish upper right decorative unit 276 Dish upper right decorative body 277 Dish upper right decorative board 278 Dish upper right decorative board 280 Dish lower left decorative unit 281 Dish lower left decorative body 282 Dish lower left reflector 283 Dish lower left decoration Substrate 285 Dish lower right decorative unit 286 Dish lower right decorative body 287 Dish lower right reflector 288 Dish lower right decorative substrate

300 Production Operation Unit 301 Production Operation Unit 302 Rotation Operation Unit 303 Press Operation Unit 303a Central Press Operation Unit 303b Outer Peripheral Press Operation Unit 310 Production Operation Unit Cover Unit 311 Unit Lower Cover 311a Drain Hole 312 Unit Front Cover 312a Plate Center Upper Body 312b Dish center lower decorative body 313 Dish center upper reflector 314 Dish center upper decorative board 315 Dish center lower reflector 316 Dish center lower decorative board 320 Operation part base 321 Main body part 321a Bottom wall 321b Through hole 322 Flange part 323 Leg part 324 Upper attachment part 325 Gear bearing portion 325 Gear bearing portion 330 Production operation ring 331 Ring mounting base 331a Placement portion 331b Boss portion 331c Through hole 332 Rotation base 332a Ring gear 333 Bush 334 Ring retaining member 35 Ring outer upper cover 335a Outer upper surface portion 335b Decoration portion 335c Outer upper cover mounting portion 336 Ring outer lower cover 336a Outer lower surface portion 336b Outer lower cover mounting portion 337 Ring inner cover 337a Inner surface portion 337b Tube surface portion 337c Inner cover Mounting portion 340 Rotation drive unit 341 Rotation drive base 342 Operation ring drive motor 343 Drive gear 344 Transmission gear 344a First gear 344b Second gear 345 Transmission detection gear member 345a Gear portion 345b Detection piece 346 Gear cover 347 First rotation detection sensor 348 Second rotation detection sensor 349 Sensor cover 350a Ring side gear part 350b Drive side gear part 351 Gear attachment member 352 Production operation ring decoration board 352a Front decoration board 352b Rear decoration board 352i Production operation unit Appendix 353 Decorative board cover 353a Front board cover 354 Vibration speaker

360 Production Operation Button Unit 361 Button Unit Base 361a Base Main Body 361b Leg 362 Guide Shaft 363 Upper Base 364 Lifting Base 364a Guide Hole 364b Central Hole 364c Standing Wall 364d Guide Pin 365 Lifting Spring 366 Central Shaft 367 Operation Button Lift Drive Motor 367a Button lift drive motor terminal 368 Lift drive gear 369 Drive gear 370 Lift cam drive gear member 370a Gear portion 370b Connection portion 370c Lift detection piece 371 Lift cam member 371a Cam portion 371b First cam 371c Locking portion 371d Second cam 371e Third Cam 371f Connected portion 372 Gear cover 373 Central button main body 373a Tube portion 373b Bottom portion 373c Guide hole 373d Central port 373e Press detection piece 37 3f Guide boss 374 Button spring 375 Central button cover 375a Top plate part 375b Peripheral wall part 376 Central button decorative board 377 Peripheral button decorative board 378 Peripheral board cover 378a Substrate part 378b Cylindrical part 379 Peripheral decorative lens 380 Peripheral button cover 380a Cylindrical part 380b Section 381 Press detection sensor 382 Elevation detection sensor 390 Operation section relay board unit 391 Board box 391a Motor cover section 391b Board box opening 391c Waterproof wall 392 Operation section relay board 392a Operation section relay board connector section 393 Board box cover 393a Board box cover Liquid induction part

400 Door frame left side unit 401 Door frame left side base 402 Frame left side decorative substrate 403 Left side reflector 404 Door frame left side decorative body 402a Left side upper decorative substrate 402b Left side lower decorative substrate 403a Through hole 410 Door frame right side unit 410a Side window 410b Side window decoration part 411 Door frame right side base 412 Side window decoration member 412a Connection base 413 Side window decoration part decoration board 414 Internal reflector 415 Right side reflector 415a Through hole 416 Door frame right side outer panel 416a Through-hole 417 Door frame right side inner panel 417a Through-hole 418 Door frame right side decorative board 418a Right side upper decorative board 418b Right side lower decorative board 419 Door frame right side decorative body

450 Door frame top unit 451 Door frame top base 451a Main body 451b Front protrusion 452 Top top cover 452a Opening 453 Door frame top decorative body 454 Door frame top bottom plate 454a Reinforcement rib 454b Central speaker port 454c Side speaker port 455 Door frame top Central decorative substrate 456 Door frame top left decorative substrate 457 Door frame top right decorative substrate 458 Top central reflector 459 Top left reflector 460 Top right reflector 461 Central speaker box 462 Top central speaker 463 Speaker bracket 464 Top side speaker 465 Top lower cover 466 Lower Cover frame 467 Door frame top relay board 468 Door frame top top plate

500 Main body frame base unit 501 Main body frame base 501a Base main body 501b Game board insertion slot 501c Game board placement part 501d Game board regulation part 501e Launcher attachment part 501f Cylinder insertion part 501g Speaker opening part 501h Cable attachment concave part 501i Cable insertion part 501j Rear extension part 501k Upper hinge attachment part 501l Lower hinge attachment part

502 Connection cable guide member 502 Connection cable guide member 502a Guide body 502b Frame piece 502c Mounting shaft 502d Through hole 503 Connection cable 504 Binding band 505 Game board lock member 510 Body frame lower hinge assembly 520 Body frame lower hinge assembly 521 Lower hinge first One body 521a Lower hinge hole for outer frame 522 Lower hinge second body 522a Lower hinge hole for door frame 522b Restriction piece 530 Body frame reinforcing frame 531 Left position restriction member 540 Ball launcher 541 Launch base 542 Launch solenoid 543 Shot ball cage 544 Launch Rail 550 Discharge base unit 551 Discharge base 551a Top plate portion 551b Left plate portion 551c Right plate portion 551d Back plate upper portion 551e Back plate left portion 551f Inner plate portion 551g Bottom plate portion 551h Connecting plate portion 551i Back cover -Mounting portion 551j Storage case portion 552 Ball tank 552a Mounting portion 552b Mounting portion 552c Mounting portion 552d Mounting portion 552e Mounting portion 553 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 557 Ball stopping member 558 External terminal plate 558a Case portion 559 Earth circuit board 560 Dispensing unit 570 Ball guiding unit 570a Guiding passage 571 Guiding unit base 572 Guiding passage front lid 573 Movable piece member 574 Ball cutting detection sensor 580 Dispensing device 580a Discharging passage 580b Ball unloading passage 581 Dispensing device main body 581 Main body side guide wall 582 Discharge device rear cover 582a Rear cover side guide wall 583 Discharge device front cover 584 Discharge motor 585 Drive gear 586 First transmission gear 587 Second transmission gear 588 Discharge gear member 5 8a payout gear 588b detecting piece 589 payout blade 589a blade pieces 589b ball housing portion 590 blade rotation detecting sensor 591 payout sensor 592 ball 抜可 Dohen 593 Tama抜 lever ER1, ER2 ground resistance

600 Upper full ball path unit 600a Upper payout ball receiving path 600b Upper ball storage path 600c Upper normal payout path 600d Upper full tank discharge path 600e Upper full ball discharge path 601 Upper full base 601a Back cover mounting part 602 Upper full cover 603 Payout Device pressing member 610 Lower full ball path unit 610a Lower normal discharge path 610b Lower full tank discharge path 610c Lower ball discharge path 611 Lower full base 612 Lower full cover 613 Discharge path opening / closing door 613a Acting protrusion 614 Closing spring

620 Substrate unit 620a Speaker unit 620b Base unit 620c Power supply unit 620d Discharge control unit 620e Interface unit 621 Speaker cover 621a Speaker mounting portion 621b Space front recess 621c Connection portion 621d Through tube 622 Main body frame speaker 623 Speaker box 623a Through tube 625a Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball extraction guiding portion 628 Discharge ball receiving portion 629 Ball discharge port 630 Power supply board 631 Power supply board cover 632 Discharge control board box 633 Discharge control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking unit

651 Unit base 652 Door frame cage 653 Outer frame cage 654 Transmission cylinder 655 Lock spring 656 Outer frame unlocking lever

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Right lower rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Out port 1009 Crime prevention recessed part 1010 Notch part 1111 Out recessed part 1112 Opening part 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1121 Through-hole 1122 Notch

1200 Substrate holder 1201 Discharge unit 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 Normal hold indicator 1404 First special symbol indicator 1405 First special hold number Indicator 1406 Second special symbol indicator 1407 Second special reserve number indicator 1408 Round indicator

1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1511 Peripheral control unit 1512 Production control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box

1600 effect display device (also referred to as game board effect display device)
1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece

2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port 2100 Starting port unit 2200 Side unit

2400 Attacker unit 2401 Gate sensor 2402 Second start opening sensor 2403 Large winning opening sensor 2404 Start opening solenoid 2405 Attacker solenoid

2500 Center character 2501 Warp inlet 2502 Warp outlet 2503 Stage 2600 Front effect unit

3000 Back unit 3001 General winning opening sensor 3002 First start opening sensor 3003 Magnetic sensor

3010 Back box 3010a Opening portion 3010b Liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c Fixing groove 3010d Notch portion 3010e Fixing piece portion 3020 Lock mechanism 3031 Panel relay substrate (drive substrate in FIG. 169)
3100 Back production unit

4000 detection sensor unit (origin position detection sensor unit in FIG. 169)
4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input unit 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 avoidance unit 4167 avoidance unit 4170 lamp drive board 4200 game ball guide path unit 4510 avoidance unit STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR contact resistance CON2 connector CON3 connector member CON4 connector member 4504-4506 connector member 5000 accessory group 01
5002 Property group 02
5004 Property group 03
5006 Property Group 04
5008 Property group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 Earth wire 5592 Earth wire 5593 Earth wire 5594 Earth wire 5595 Earth wire

The gaming machine according to [Means 1]
Control means for controlling game effects;
In a gaming machine comprising an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The operation unit is
An electrical component controlled by the control means ;
By the control by the control means, comprising a vibration unit capable of generating vibrations at the time of game presentation and power-on,
Furthermore, a protection mechanism for protecting the electrical component against foreign matter entering from above the electrical component is provided ,
The gaming machine characterized in that the protection mechanism can be vibrated by vibration generated in the vibration unit .

Claims (1)

Control means for controlling game effects;
In a gaming machine comprising an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The operation unit is
Comprising an electrical component controlled by the control means;
Furthermore, the game machine characterized by including the protection mechanism which protects the said electrical equipment part with respect to the foreign material which approachs from the upper direction of the said electrical equipment part.

Images